Table of Contents
Quick task index

DIGITAL CAMERA

Instruction Manual1.

Preparation2.

Shooting

3.

Playback

4.

Menu functions

5.

Connecting the camera to asmartphone

6.

Connecting the camera to acomputer and a printer

7.

Cautions

8.

Information

9.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Additions/modifications by

10. firmware update

Model No. : IM002
Thank you for purchasing an Olympus digital camera. Before you start to use your new camera,
please read these instructions carefully to enjoy optimum performance and a longer service life.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
We recommend that you take test shots to get accustomed to your camera before taking important
photographs.
The screen and camera illustrations shown in this manual were produced during the development
stages and may differ from the actual product.
If there are additions and/or modifications of functions due to firmware update for the camera, thecontents will differ. For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website.

 This notice concerns the supplied flash unit and is chiefly directed to users inNorth America.

Information for Your Safety

IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONSWhen using your photographic equipment, basic safety precautions should always befollowed, including the following:• Read and understand all instructions before using.
• Close supervision is necessary when any flash is used by or near children. Do not leave
flash unattended while in use.
• Care must be taken as burns can occur from touching hot parts.
• Do not operate if the flash has been dropped or damaged - until it has been examined byqualified service personnel.
• Let flash cool completely before putting away.
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not immerse this flash in water or other liquids.
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this flash, but take it to qualified
service personnel when service or repair work is required. Incorrect reassembly cancause electric shock when the flash is used subsequently.
• The use of an accessory attachment not recommended by the manufacturer may cause arisk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

Indications used in this manual
The following symbols are used throughout this manual.

2 EN% TipsUseful information and hints that will help you get the most out ofyour camera.

g

Reference pages describing details or related information.

Table of Contents
8

Names of parts

10

Preparation

12

Unpacking the box contents .....12
Charging and inserting thebattery .........................................13
Inserting the card .......................15
Attaching a lens to thecamera .........................................16
Using the monitor.......................17
Turning the camera on ...............18
Setting the date/time ..................19

Shooting

20

Information displays whileshooting ......................................20
Switching between displays......22
Switching the information
display ......................................23
Shooting still pictures................24
Letting the camera choose
aperture and shutter speed(Program mode) .......................26
Choosing aperture(Aperture Priority mode) ...........27
Choosing shutter speed(Shutter Priority mode) .............28
Choosing aperture and shutter
speed (Manual mode)...............29
Shooting with long exposure time
(BULB/LIVE TIME) ...................30
Live composite photography (darkand light field composite) ..........30
Letting the camera choose thesettings (iAUTO mode) .............31
Using art filters..........................33

Custom Modes (C1, C2, C3) ....35
Shooting with touch screen
operations .................................35
Recording movies ......................36
Using movie mode (n) ............37
Using the silencing function
when shooting a movie .............38
Using various settings ...............39
Controlling exposure(Exposure F) ...........................39
Selecting the AF target mode
(AF target settings) ...................39
Setting the AF target .................40
Face priority AF/
Eye priority AF ..........................40
Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF (Super
Spot AF)....................................41
Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO) .........................................42
Adjusting color (WB (whitebalance))...................................42
Choosing a focus mode (AFMode) .......................................43
Choosing how the camera
measures brightness(Metering) .................................45
Locking the exposure(AE Lock) ..................................45
Performing the sequential/selftimer shooting ...........................46
Shooting without the vibration
caused by shutter button
operations (Anti-Shock z) ......47
Shooting without shutter sound(Silent [♥]) .................................47
Shooting without a release timelag (Pro Capture shooting) .......48
Shooting still pictures in a higher
resolution (High Res Shot) .......48
Taking HDR (High Dynamic
Range) images .........................49

Table of Contents

Quick task index

EN 3

Table of Contents
4 EN

Setting in super control panel ...50
Making fine adjustments to whitebalance (WB Compensation)....52
Reducing camera shake(Image Stabilizer) .....................53
Setting the image aspect ..........54
Setting the saving method forshooting data
(K Save Settings) ...................54
Selecting image quality(KK) ....................................55
Selecting image quality(nK) .....................................56
Using a flash(Flash photography) .................57
Adjusting flash output (Flashintensity control) .......................60
Processing options (PictureMode) .......................................61
Making fine adjustments to
sharpness (Sharpness) ............62
Making fine adjustments tocontrast (Contrast) ....................62
Making fine adjustments tosaturation (Saturation) ..............63
Making fine adjustments to tone
(Gradation) ...............................63
Applying filter effects tomonochrome pictures (Color
Filter) ........................................64
Adjusting the tone of a
monochrome image(Monochrome Color).................64
Adjusting i-Enhance effects(Effect) ......................................65
Setting the color reproduction
format (Color Space) ................65
Changing the brightnessof highlights and shadows(Highlight&Shadow) ..................66
Assigning functions to buttons(Button Function) ......................66
Adjusting overall color (Color
Creator) ....................................71

Shooting “My Clips” ..................72
Editing “My Clips” .....................73
Shooting slow/quick motion
movies ......................................75

Playback

76

Information display during
playback ......................................76
Playback image information .....76
Switching the information
display ......................................77
Viewing photographs andmovies .........................................78
Index display/Calendar
display ......................................79
Viewing still images ..................79
Volume......................................80
Watching movies ......................81
Protecting images .....................81
Copying an image (Copy) .........81
Erasing an image......................82
Selecting images (0, Copy
Select, Erase Selected, Share
Order Selected) ........................82
Setting a transfer order on images(Share Order) ...........................82
Audio recording ........................83
Adding still pictures to My Clips(Add to My Clips) ......................83
Using the touch screen..............84
Selecting and protecting
images ......................................84

Menu functions

85

Basic menu operations ..............85
Using Shooting Menu 1/
Shooting Menu 2 ........................86
Returning to default settings(Reset) ......................................86
Registering favorites settings(Assign to Custom Mode) .........87

Using the Video Menu ..............100
Adding effects to a movie .......102
Setting the record mode(nK) ...................................102
Setting the sound recording formovie (Movie K) .....................103
Recording movie audio with an IC
recorder ..................................104
Using the Playback Menu ........105
Displaying images rotated(R) ........................................105
Editing still images ..................105
Saving a still image from a movie(In-Movie Image Capture).......107
Trimming movies (Movie
Trimming) ...............................108
Canceling all protections ........108
Copy All ..................................108

Using the setup menu ..............109
Formatting the card
(Card Setup) ........................... 110
Deleting all images(Card Setup) ........................... 110
Using the custom menus......... 111
J AF/MF................................ 111
K AF/MF ............................... 112
L AF/MF ............................... 112
M Button/Dial/Lever .............. 113
N Release/j/Image
Stabilizer ................................. 114
O Release/j/Image
Stabilizer ................................ 114
P Disp/8/PC ...................... 115
Q Disp/8/PC ....................... 115
R Disp/8/PC ...................... 116
S Disp/8/PC ....................... 117
T Exp/ISO/BULB/p ............ 117
U Exp/ISO/BULB/p ............ 118
V Exp/ISO/BULB/p ............ 118
W # Custom ......................... 118
X K/WB/Color .................... 119
Y Record/Erase ....................120
Z Record/Erase ...................121
a EVF ...................................121b K Utility ...........................122
c K Utility ..........................122
AEL/AFL .................................123
MF Assist ................................124
K Fn Lever Function ............124
Choosing the control
panel displays (KControl
Settings) .................................125
Adding information displays....127
Shooting self-portraits using theselfie assist menu ...................129
Viewing camera images on
TV ...........................................130
Shutter speeds when the flash
fires .........................................131

Table of Contents

Processing options (PictureMode) .......................................88
Image quality (KK) ..............88
Digital Zoom (Digital Teleconverter) .................................88
Setting the custom self-timer(j/Y) .....................................89
Shooting automatically with afixed interval (i time lapse
shooting) ...................................90
Varying settings over a seriesof photographs (Bracketing) .....91
Recording multiple exposuresin a single image (Multiple
Exposure) .................................95
Keystone correction andperspective control (KeystoneComp.) ......................................97
Setting anti-shock/silent shooting(Anti-Shock z/Silent [♥]) .........98
Setting high resolution shooting(High Res Shot) ........................99
Shooting with remote control
wireless flash ............................99

EN 5

Table of Contents

Combinations of JPEG
image sizes and compression
rates........................................131
Setting the card to record to ...132
Saving lens info ......................132
Selecting the display style of the
viewfinder ...............................133

Cautions

146

Battery and charger .................146
Using the optional AC
adapter ......................................146

Connecting the camera to asmartphone
134

Using your charger abroad .....147

Connecting to a smartphone...135

Record mode and file size/numberof storable still pictures ...........148

Transferring images to asmartphone ...............................136
Shooting remotely with asmartphone ...............................136
Adding position information toimages .......................................137
Changing the connection
method ......................................137

Usable cards .............................147

Interchangeable lenses............149
HLD-9 Power Battery Holder ...150
External flash units designatedfor use with this camera ..........152
Wireless remote control flash
photography............................153
Other external flash units ........154

Changing the password...........138

Principal Accessories ..............155

Cancelling a share order .........138

System chart .............................156

Initializing wireless LAN
settings......................................138

Cleaning and storing thecamera .......................................158
Cleaning the camera ..............158
Storage ...................................158
Cleaning and checking the image
pickup device ..........................158
Pixel Mapping - Checking theimage processing functions ....159

Connecting the camera to acomputer and a printer139
Connecting the camera to acomputer ...................................139
Copying pictures to acomputer ...................................140
Installing the PC software .......141
Installing the OLYMPUS Digital
Camera Updater........................141
User Registration .....................141
Direct printing (PictBridge) .....142
Easy printing ...........................142
Custom printing ......................143
Print order (DPOF)....................144
Creating a print order..............144

6 EN

Removing all or selected picturesfrom the print order .................145

After Service .............................159

Information

160

Shooting tips andinformation................................160
Error codes ...............................162
Menu directory..........................165
Default Custom Mode
options ......................................175
Specifications ...........................177

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS180

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..........180

Index

213

Table of Contents

Additions/modifications byfirmware update
190

EN 7

Quick task index
Quick task index
8 ENg

Shooting
Changing the AF area size andposition

AF Area40

Limiting the autofocus area forquicker focusing

AF Limiter

111

Adjusting AF tracking performance tomatch changes in subject distance

C-AF Lock

111

Changing the focus position with atouch on the monitor while using the
viewfinder

AF Targeting Pad

112

Using Touch AF

Using the touch screen

35

Using AF on a small point

Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF

41

Changing the viewfinder frame rate

Frame Rate (High)115

Using a dynamic range like that of an
optical viewfinder

S-OVF (Optical viewfinder
simulation)

121

Shooting without the shutter soundSilent [♥]47

Reducing shutter blurAnti-Shock z/Silent [♥]47

Shooting without time lag

Pro Capture shooting

48

Shooting images equivalent to 50M
pixelHigh Res Shot48

Correcting the perspective whenshooting

Keystone Comp.

97

Shooting images in focus from theforeground to the background

Focus Stacking

94

Automatically shifting the focus
position when shooting

Focus bracketing

94

Using dark and light field composite
when shooting

Live composite

30

Checking the progress whenshooting with long exposure time

Bulb/Time photography

30

Reducing camera shake

Image Stabilizer

53

Reducing fixed pattern noise whenshooting with long exposure time

Noise Reduct.

118

Checking subjects in the viewfinder
even when shooting in low-light
conditions

Live View Boost

115

Using two SD card slots
simultaneously

Double slot

15, 54, 132

Checking horizontal or verticalorientation before shooting

Level Gauge

23

Shooting with deliberate composition

Displayed Grid (Grid Settings)

116

n Picture Mode(n Specification Settings)

100

Recording audio using an external
recorder

Linking to external devices

104

Zooming in on photos to check focus

Auto q (Rec View)

109

Extending the useful life of thebattery

Quick Sleep Mode

122

Checking battery usage and status

Battery Status

122gPlayback/Retouch
Shooting by outputting to the externalmonitor

HDMI

117

Brightening shadows

Shadow Adj (JPEG Edit)

106

Dealing with red-eye

Redeye Fix (JPEG Edit)

106

Extracting still images from a 4K
movie

In-Movie Image Capture

107

Trimming unwanted sections ofmoviesMovie Trimming

108

Transferring images to a smartphone

Transferring images to asmartphone

136

Adding location data to images

Adding location data to images

137gOthersSaving the settings

Assign to Custom Mode87

Changing the menu display language

Changing the display language

109

Turning off the auto focus soundBeep sound117

gOthers - Basic Shooting
Taking pictures with the best finish/Taking black and white pictures

Quick task index

Shooting in a mode that is good forimage editing

Picture Mode61, 88Art Filter (ART)

33

EN 9

Names of parts
Names of parts

1
2
3
4
5

b

6
7
8

f
g
h
i
j

m

k
l

p

9
0
a
1 Mode dial lock .................................P. 24
2 Rear dial* (o).......................P. 26 – 29, 42, 70, 78, 128
3 Fn2 button......................................P. 70
4 R (Movie)/H button ..............P. 36/P. 82
5 Front dial* (r).........................P. 26 – 29, 39, 42, 70, 78
6 Shutter button .................................P. 25
7 Self-timer lamp/AF illuminator.......................................P. 46, 54/P. 112
8 Lens attachment mark ....................P. 16
9 Y (One-touch white balance) button........................................................P. 67
0 Z (Preview) button .........................P. 67
a Mount (Remove the body cap before
attaching the lens.)b Mode dial ........................................P. 24
c Stereo microphone .........P. 83, 103, 107
d ON/OFF lever ................................P. 18

c
d
e

o

e v button
AFm (AF/Metering mode) button................................................... P. 43, 45
jYHDR (Sequential shooting/Self-timer/HDR) button .......P. 46, 49, 91
f External flash terminal ..................P. 154
g Microphone jack coverh Headphone jack coveri Strap eyelet.....................................P. 12
j Connector coverk Lens release button ........................P. 17
l Lens lock pin
m Microphone jack (A commerciallyavailable microphone can be connected.
ø3.5 stereo mini plug) ...................P. 104
n Headphone jack (A commerciallyavailable headphones can beconnected. ø3.5 stereo pin jack)o HDMI connector (type D) ..............P. 130
p USB connector (type C)......................................P. 104, 139, 142* In this manual, the r and o icons represent operations performed using the front dial
and rear dial.

10 EN

n

7

1
2
3

b
c

4

d

5

e
f
g

6

Names of parts

8
9
0
a

l
h
m
i

n
j
k

1 Diopter adjustment dial ...................P. 22
2 u (LV) button .........................P. 22, 68
3 Monitor (Touch screen)..........................P. 20, 22, 35, 50, 76, 84
4 Viewfinder .........................P. 20, 22, 133
5 Eye sensor
6 Eyecup ..........................................P. 155
7 Hot shoe .................................P. 57, 152
8 Fn lever ...........................P. 26 – 29, 124
9 AEL/AFL button ..............P. 45, 81, 123
0 INFO button .............................P. 23, 77
a Fn1 button................................P. 40, 78
b Q button ............................P. 50, 78, 85
c Arrow pad* ......................................P. 78

od MENU button .................................P. 85
e q (Playback) button......................P. 78
f Speakerg  (Erase) button ............................P. 82
h PBH cover.....................................P. 150
i Tripod socket
j Battery compartment cover.............P. 13
k Battery compartment lock ...............P. 13
l Card compartment cover ................P. 15
m Card slot 1 (UHS-II compatible) ......P. 15
n Card slot 2 (UHS-I compatible) .......P. 15
o Remote cable terminal cover(Remote cable terminal) ...............P. 155* In this manual, the FGHI icons represent operations performed using the arrow pad.

EN 11

1 Preparation
1

Unpacking the box contents

Preparation

The following items are included with the camera.
If anything is missing or damaged, contact the dealer from whom you purchased thecamera.

CameraFlash
FL-LM3

Body cap

Lithium-ion battery
BLH-1

Strap

Lithium-ion charger
BCH-1

USB cable
CB-USB11

Cable clip
CC-1

Attaching the strap
2

4
3
1

• Attach the strap on the other side in the same way.
• Lastly, pull the strap firmly, making sure that it is fastened securely.

12 EN

5

Attaching the cable clip
Use the cable clip to secure the cable, then attach
it to the strap.
The cable clip can also be attached to the strap
eyelet.

1
Preparation

Charging and inserting the battery

1

Charge the battery.

Charging indicator
Charging in progress

Less than 50%
50% or more
Less than 80%
80% or more
Less than 100%

Blinks in orange 1 time/second
Blinks in orange 2 times/second
Blinks in orange 3 times/second

Charging complete
Charging error

Lights up in green
Blinks in green 5 times/second(Charging time: Approximately 2 hours)
Direction indicating mark (▲)
Lithium-ion
charger1
3
Charging indicator
Lithium-ion
battery

AC wall outlet

2
AC cable• Unplug the charger when charging is complete.

2

Open the battery compartment cover.

Battery compartment cover2

Battery compartment
lock

1

EN 13

3

Loading the battery.

1
Preparation

Direction indicating markRemoving the battery
Turn off the camera before opening or closing the battery
compartment cover. To remove the battery, first push thebattery lock knob in the direction of the arrow and thenremove.
• Contact an authorized distributor or service center if you
are unable to remove the battery. Do not use force.

• It is recommended to set aside a backup battery for prolonged shooting in case thebattery in use drains.
• Also read “Battery and charger” (P. 146).

14 EN

Inserting the card
The following types of SD memory card (commercially available) can be used with thiscamera: SD, SDHC, SDXC, and Eye-Fi.

Read “Usable cards” (P. 147) before use.

11
Preparation

Eye-Fi cards

Open the card compartment cover.
1

2

2

Slide the card in until it is locked into place.
• Shooting data will be recorded according to theselected option for [K Save Settings] (P. 54).
• g “Usable cards” (P. 147)
• Turn off the camera before loading or removing
the card.
• Do not forcibly insert a damaged or deformed
card. Doing so may damage the card slot.

Card slot 1
Card slot 2

Terminal area

3

Close the card compartment cover.
• Close it securely until you hear it click.
• Be sure the card compartment cover is closed before using thecamera.

2
1• Cards must be formatted with this camera before first use (P. 110).
• If a UHS-II card is inserted into the slot 2 (UHS-I compatible), the card operates as
UHS-I.
• Multiple Eye-Fi cards cannot be used at the same time.

Removing the card
Press the card in to eject it. Pull out the card.
• Do not remove the battery or card while the card write indicator (P. 21)
is displayed.

EN 15

Attaching a lens to the camera

1

1Rear cap

Remove the rear cap of the lensand the body cap of the camera.

1

Preparation

2

2

2

1

Align the lens attachment mark (red) on
the camera with the alignment mark (red)on the lens, then insert the lens into thecamera’s body.

Lens attachment mark3

Rotate the lens clockwise until you hear it
click (direction indicated by arrow 3).

3• Make sure the camera is turned off when attaching or removing the lens.
• Do not press the lens release button.
• Do not touch internal portions of the camera.

Removing the lens cap
1
1
2
1

16 EN

1
2


Removing the lens from the camera
Make sure the camera is turned off when removing thelens. While pressing the lens release button, rotate thelens in the direction of the arrow.

Lens release button

2

1
Preparation

1

Interchangeable lenses
Read “Interchangeable lenses” (P. 149).

Using the monitor
You can change the orientation and angle of the monitor.

1

2

3
90°

1

2

3

270°

• Rotate the monitor gently within the limits shown. Do not use force; failure to observe thisprecaution could damage the connectors.
• If you are using a power zoom lens, it will automatically move to the wide angle side whenthe monitor is set in the selfie position.
• When the monitor is in the selfie position, you can switch to the screen for taking self
portraits. g “Shooting self-portraits using the selfie assist menu” (P. 129)

EN 17

Turning the camera on

1

1

Set the ON/OFF lever to the ON position.
• When the camera is turned on, the monitor will turn on.
• To turn the camera off, return the lever to the OFF position.

Preparation


ON/OFF lever
MonitorBattery level

ON

OFF

Battery icon and battery level (%) aredisplayed.
j (green): The camera is ready to shoot.
k (green): The battery is not full.
l (green): The battery is low.
m (blinks red): Charge the battery.
100% Wi-Fi

ISO-A

200

250 F5.6

1:02:03

38

Camera sleep operation
If no operations are performed for a minute, the camera enters “sleep” (stand-by) mode toturn off the monitor and to cancel all actions. The camera activates again when you press
any button (the shutter button, q button, etc.). The camera will turn off automatically ifleft in sleep mode for 4 hours. Turn the camera on again before use.

18 EN

Setting the date/time
Date and time information is recorded on the card together with the images. The filename is also included with the date and time information. Be sure to set the correct
date and time before using the camera. Some functions cannot be used if the date andtime have not been set.

Preparation

1

Display the menus.
• Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Shooting Menu 1

100%

1 Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
2
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converterj /Y /MENU button
Back

2

Select [X] in the [d] (setup) tab.

1
2

Setup Menu
Card Setup--.--.-- --:--:-English
j±0 k±00.5 secW
Rec View
Wi-Fi Settings
Firmware[d] tabBack

3
4

Set the date, time, and date format.
• Use HI to select items.
• Use FG to change the selected item.

Select [W] (changing the display
language) in the [d] (setup) tab.
• You can change the language used forthe on-screen display and error messages
from English to another language.

5

4:3
Off

Set

100%

• Use FG on the arrow pad to select [d]and press I.
• Select [X] and press I.

1

Set

X

100%

Y

M

D

Time
Y /M/D2017

CancelThe time is displayedusing a 24-hour clock.

Save settings and exit.
• Press the Q button to set the camera clock and exit to the menu.
• Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

• If the battery is removed from the camera and the camera is left for a while, the date andtime may be reset to the factory default setting.

EN 19

2 Shooting
Information displays while shooting

2

Monitor display during still photography

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0a r b

Shooting

G

FPS

Wi-Fi FP RC BKT

100%

F
E
D
C
B

off

cd

28mm

e UTO1
f
B
g TO
h
i 3
j N
k
l H
m

S-IS AUTO

WB
AUTO

S-AF
ISO-A

400

-2.0

4:3

A

LN

+2

z
y

-3

C1 AEL

P

t

sr

FHD F
60p

1:02:03

250 F5.6 +2.0
xwvu

+7

1023

q

p on

Monitor display during movie mode

I
100%

M

Wi-Fi RL

28mm

TC 00:00:00:04 DF

M-IS 1

C-AF
ISO
AUTO

J

P
FHD F
60p

n

01:02:03

L

20 EN

K

i Aspect ratio .....................................P. 54
j Image quality (still images) .......P. 55, 88
k Record mode (movies) ...................P. 56
l n Save slot .................................P. 132
m Available recording time ...............P. 148
n Number of storable still pictures ...P. 148
o K Save Settings ...........................P. 54
p Highlight & shadow control .............P. 66
q Top: Flash intensity control .............P. 60
Bottom: Exposure compensation ....P. 39
r Level gauge ....................................P. 23
s Exposure compensation value........P. 39
t Aperture value ........................ P. 26 – 29
u Shutter speed ......................... P. 26 – 29v Histogram .......................................P. 23
w Preview ...........................................P. 67
x AE lock....................................P. 45, 123
y Shooting mode........................ P. 24 – 37
z Custom mode ...........................P. 35, 87
A Touch operation ..............................P. 35
B Flash intensity control .....................P. 60
C ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 42, 51
D AF mode ...................................P. 43, 51
E Metering mode ..........................P. 45, 51
F Flash mode .....................................P. 57
G Battery level ....................................P. 18
H Live guide recall ..............................P. 31

2
Shooting

1 Card write indicator .........................P. 15
2 Wireless LAN connection.....P. 134 – 138
3 Super FP flash ..............................P. 152
4 RC mode.......................................P. 153
5 Auto bracket/HDR ..................P. 91/P. 49
6 Multiple exposure............................P. 95
D Keystone compensation ...........P. 97
7 High frame rate .............................P. 115
S-OVF* ....................................P. 121
8 Digital Tele-converter ......................P. 88
9 Time lapse shooting........................P. 90
0 Face priority/Eye priority .................P. 40
a Movie sound .................................P. 103
b Zoom operation direction/
Focal length/Internal temperature
warning m ...........................P. 164
c Flash ...............................................P. 57(blinks: charging in progress, lights up:
charging completed)d AF confirmation mark......................P. 25
e Image stabilizer...............................P. 53
f Picture mode.............................P. 61, 88
g White balance ...........................P. 42, 52
h Sequential shooting/Self-timer/
Anti-Shock shooting/Silent shooting/
Pro Capture shooting/High resolution shooting ....P. 46 – 48, 54* Shown in viewfinder only.

I Recording level meter ...................P. 103
J Silent shooting tab ..........................P. 38
K Movie (exposure) mode ................P. 102
L Movie effect ....................................P. 37
M Time code .....................................P. 101

EN 21

Switching between displays
The camera is equipped with an eye sensor, which turns the viewfinder on when you
put your eye to the viewfinder. When you take your eye away, the sensor turns the
viewfinder off and turns the monitor on.

2
Shooting

Put youreye to theviewfinder

Viewfinder

Monitor
100%

Wi-Fi

100%

S-IS AUTO

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A

ISO-A

200

200

LN

LN

FHD F

FHD F

60P

60P

250 F5.6

1:02:03

P

38

Live view is displayed on the monitor.

250 F5.6

1:02:03

38

The viewfinder turns on automaticallywhen you bring it to your eye. Whenthe viewfinder is lit up, the monitor
turns off.

• The viewfinder will not turn on when the monitor is tilted.
• If the viewfinder is not in focus, put your eye to theviewfinder and focus the display by rotating the
diopter adjustment dial.

• Press the u button to switch between live view and viewfinder shooting (live view andsuper control panel display). If the super control panel (P. 50) is displayed in the monitor, theviewfinder will turn on when you put your eye to the viewfinder.
• You can display the EVF Auto Switch setting menu if you press and hold the u button.
g [EVF Auto Switch] (P. 121)

22 EN

Switching the information display
You can switch the information displayed in
the monitor during shooting using the INFO
button.

INFO button

2
100% Wi-Fi

S-IS AUTO

Shooting

100%

INFO

ISO-A

200

LN
FHD F
60p

250 F5.6

1:02:03

38

Image Only

Basic Information

INFO

S-IS AUTO

S-IS AUTO

INFO
ISO-A

ISO-A

200

200

P

INFO

100% Wi-Fi

100% Wi-Fi

250 F5.6

1:02:03

38

Level Gauge display(Custom2)

P

1:02:03

250 F5.6

38

Histogram display(Custom1)• You can change Custom1 and Custom2 settings. g [G/Info Settings] > [LV-Info] (P. 115),[V Info Settings] (P. 121)• The information shown in movie (n) mode can differ from that displayed in still
photography mode. g Video Menu > [n Display Settings] (P. 101)
• The information display screens can be switched in either direction by rotating the dial
while pressing the INFO button.
Histogram display
A histogram showing the distribution of brightness
in the image is displayed. The horizontal axis
gives the brightness, the vertical axis the numberof pixels of each brightness in the image. Areas
above the upper limit at shooting are displayed inred, those below the lower limit in blue, and thosewithin the spot metering range in green.

More
Less
Dark

BrightLevel gauge display
The orientation of the camera is indicated. The “tilt” direction is indicated on the vertical bar
and the “horizon” direction on the horizontal bar.
Use the indicators on the level gauge as a guide.

EN 23

Shooting still pictures
Use the mode dial to select the shooting mode,and then shoot the image.

Indicator

Mode icon

2
Shooting

Types of shooting modes
For how to use the various shooting modes, see the following.
P...........................................................P. 26
A ..........................................................P. 27
S...........................................................P. 28
M ..........................................................P. 29

1

A ....................................................P. 31
ART .....................................................P. 33
n .........................................................P. 37
C1/C2/C3 ............................................P. 35

Press the mode dial lock to unlock it, and then turn to set the mode you wish
to use.
• When the mode dial lock has been pressed down, the mode dial is locked. Each time
you press the mode dial lock, it switches between locked/released.

2

Frame the shot.
• Be careful that your fingers
or the camera strap do
not obstruct the lens or AF
illuminator.

Landscape position

24 EN

Portrait position

3

Adjust the focus.
• Display the subject in the center of the monitor, and lightly press the shutter button
down to the first position (press the shutter button halfway).
The AF confirmation mark (() will be displayed, and a green frame (AF target) will
be displayed in the focus location.
AF confirmation mark
100%

2

28mm

200

Press the shutter
button halfway.
250 F5.6

1:02:0338

Shooting

ISO-A

AF target• If the AF confirmation mark blinks, the subject is not in focus. (P. 160)

4

Release the shutter.
• Press the shutter button all the way (fully).
• The camera will release the shutter and take a picture.
• The shot image will be displayed on the monitor.

• You can focus and take pictures using touch controls. g “Shooting with touch screen
operations” (P. 35)

Pressing the shutter button halfway and all the way down
The shutter button has two positions. The act of lightly pressing the shutter button to thefirst position and holding it there is called “pressing the shutter button halfway,” that ofpressing it all the way down to the second position “pressing the shutter button all (or the
rest of) the way down.”
Press halfway

Press the rest of
the way down

EN 25

Letting the camera choose aperture and shutter speed(Program mode)
P mode is a shooting mode where the camera automatically sets the optimal apertureand shutter speed according to subject brightness. Set the mode dial to P.
100%

S-IS AUTO

2

ISO-A

200

Shooting

LN
FHD F

60P

P

1:02:03

250 F5.6

38

Aperture value
Shutter speed
Shooting mode

• The shutter speed and aperture selected by the camera are displayed.
• The functions that can be set using the dial differ depending on the Fn lever position.
Fn lever position

Dial

1

2

r

Exposure compensationISOoProgram shift

White balance• The shutter speed and aperture value displays will blink if the camera is unable to achievecorrect exposure.
Warning display
example (blinking)StatusAction60" F2.8

The subject is too
dark.

• Use the flash.

8000 F22

The subject is toobright.

• The metered range of the camera isexceeded. A commercially available ND
filter (for adjusting the amount of light) is
required.

• The aperture value at the moment when its indication blinks varies with the lens type andfocal length of the lens.
• When using a fixed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO)” (P. 42, 51)

Program shift (%)

In P mode, you can choose different combinations ofaperture value and shutter speed without altering exposure.
“s” is displayed next to the shooting mode when the
program shift is enabled. To cancel the program shift, rotate
the dial until “s” is no longer displayed.

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A

200

LN
FHD F

60P

Ps

250 F5.6

Program shift

26 EN

1:02:0338

Choosing aperture (Aperture Priority mode)
A mode is a shooting mode where you choose the aperture and let the camera
automatically adjust to the appropriate shutter speed. Set the mode dial to A to set theaperture value. Larger apertures (lower F-numbers) decrease depth of field (the areain front of or behind the focus point that appears to be in focus), softening backgrounddetails. Smaller apertures (higher F-numbers) increase depth of field.
100% Wi-Fi

S-IS AUTO

400

LN
FHD F

60P

A

1:02:03

250 F5.6

38

Shooting

ISO-A

2

Aperture value• The functions that can be set using the dial differ depending on the Fn lever position.
Fn lever position

Dial

1

2

r

Exposure compensationISOoAperture value

White balance

Setting the aperture value

Decreasing aperture value  Increasing aperture value

F2.8 F4.0 F5.6 F8.0 F11
• The shutter speed display will blink if the camera is unable to achieve correct
exposure.
Warning display
example (blinking)60" F5.6

8000 F5.6

StatusActionThe subject isunderexposed.

• Decrease the aperture value.

The subject isoverexposed.

• Increase the aperture value.
• If the warning display does not disappear,
the metered range of the camera isexceeded. A commercially available ND
filter (for adjusting the amount of light) is
required.

• The aperture value at the moment when its indication blinks varies with the lens type andfocal length of the lens.
• When using a fixed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO)” (P. 42, 51)

EN 27

Choosing shutter speed (Shutter Priority mode)
S mode is a shooting mode where you choose the shutter speed and let the camera
automatically adjust to the appropriate aperture value. Set the mode dial to S to set the
shutter speed. A fast shutter speed can freeze a fast action scene without any blur. A
slow shutter speed will blur a fast action scene. This blurring will give the impression of
dynamic motion.

2

100% Wi-Fi

S-IS AUTO

Shooting

ISO-A

400

LN
FHD F

F
60P

S

1:02:03

250 F5.6

38

Shutter speed• The functions that can be set using the dial differ depending on the Fn lever position.
Fn lever position

Dial

1

2

r

Exposure compensationISOoShutter speed

White balance

Setting the shutter speed

Slower shutter speed  Faster shutter speed60" 15 30 60 125 250 8000• The aperture value display will blink if the camera is unable to achieve correct
exposure.
Warning display
example (blinking)2000 F2.8

125 F22

StatusActionThe subject isunderexposed.

• Set the shutter speed slower.

The subject isoverexposed.

• Set the shutter speed faster.
• If the warning display does not disappear,
the metered range of the camera isexceeded. A commercially available ND
filter (for adjusting the amount of light) is
required.

• The aperture value at the moment when its indication blinks varies with the lens type andfocal length of the lens.
• When using a fixed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO)” (P. 42, 51)

28 EN

Choosing aperture and shutter speed (Manual mode)
M mode is a shooting mode where you choose both the aperture value and shutter
speed. Bulb, time, and live composite photography are also available. Set the mode
dial to M to set the aperture value and the shutter speed.
100% Wi-Fi

S-IS AUTO

2

ISO

400

FHD F

60P

M

250 F5.6 +0.3

1:02:0338

Difference fromcorrect exposure

Shooting

LN• The functions that can be set using the dial differ depending on the Fn lever position.
Dial

Fn lever position
12rAperture value

Exposure compensation*oShutter speedISO* When [AUTO] is selected for [ISO], exposure compensation can be adjusted.
100% Wi-Fi

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A

400

LN
FHD F

60P

M

250 F5.6 +0.3

01:02:03

38

Exposure compensation
Difference between exposure setting andexposure with exposure compensation• The exposure determined by the aperture value and shutter speed you have set andthe difference from the suitable exposure measured by the camera are displayed on themonitor.
• Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/8000 and 60 seconds or to [BULB], [LIVETIME], or [LIVECOMP].
• If you change the aperture value and shutter speed, the brightness of the display on themonitor (or viewfinder) will not change. To display the image as it is going to be shot, set[Live View Boost] (P. 115) in Custom Menu.
• Even when you have set [Noise Reduct.], noise and/or light spots may still be noticeable
in the image displayed on the monitor and shot images under certain environmental
conditions (temperature etc.) and camera settings.

EN 29

Noise in images

2

While shooting at slow shutter speeds, noise may appear on screen. These phenomena
occur when the temperature rises in the image pickup device or image pickup device
internal drive circuit, causing current to be generated in those sections of the image pickup
device that are not normally exposed to light. This can also occur when shooting with ahigh ISO setting in a high-temperature environment. To reduce this noise, the camera
activates the noise reduction function. g [Noise Reduct.] (P. 118)

Shooting

Shooting with long exposure time (BULB/LIVE TIME)
You can use the BULB/LIVE TIME function for shooting scenes that require longexposure such as night landscapes and fireworks. In M mode, set the shutter speed to[BULB] or [LIVE TIME].
Bulb photography(BULB):The shutter remains open while the shutter button is pressed.
The exposure ends when the shutter button is released.

Time photography(LIVE TIME):The exposure begins when the shutter button is pressed all theway down. To end the exposure, press the shutter button all theway down again.

• During bulb or time photography, the screen brightness changes automatically. g [Bulb/
Time Monitor] (P. 118)
• When using [LIVE TIME], the progress of the exposure will be displayed in the monitor
during shooting. The display can also be refreshed by pressing the shutter button halfway.
• [Live Bulb] (P. 118) can be used to display the image exposure during bulb photography.
• [BULB] and [LIVE TIME] are not available at some ISO sensitivity settings.
• To reduce camera blur, mount the camera on a sturdy tripod and use a remote cable (P. 155).
• During shooting, there are limits on the settings for the following functions.
Sequential shooting, self-timer shooting, time lapse shooting, AE bracket shooting,image stabilizer, flash bracketing, multiple exposure*, etc.
* When an option other than [Off] is selected for [Live Bulb] or [Live Time] (P. 118)
• [Image Stabilizer] (P. 53) turns off automatically.

Live composite photography (dark and light field composite)
You can record a composite image from multiple shots while observing changes inbright flashes of light, such as fireworks and stars, without changing the brightness ofthe background.

30 EN

1
2

Set an exposure time to be the reference in [Composite Settings] (P. 118).

3

Press the shutter button once to prepare for shooting.

4

Press the shutter button.

In M mode, set the shutter speed to [LIVECOMP].
• When the shutter speed is set to [LIVECOMP], you can display the [Composite
Settings] by pressing the MENU button.
• You can shoot when a message that indicates preparations are complete is displayedin the monitor.
• Live composite shooting begins. A composite image is displayed after each reference
exposure time, allowing you to observe changes in light.
• During composite shooting, the screen brightness changes automatically. g [Bulb/
Time Monitor] (P. 118)

5

Press the shutter button to end shooting.
• The maximum length of composite shooting is 3 hours. However, the available
shooting time will vary depending on shooting conditions, and charging state of thecamera.

Letting the camera choose the settings (iAUTO mode)
The camera adjusts settings to suit the scene; all you have to do is press the shutter
button.
Use live guides to easily adjust such parameters as color, brightness, and backgroundblurring.

1
2

2
Shooting• There are limits on the available ISO sensitivity settings.
• To reduce camera blur, mount the camera on a sturdy tripod and use a remote cable (P. 155).
• During shooting, there are limits on the settings for the following functions.
Sequential shooting, self-timer shooting, time lapse shooting, AE bracket shooting,image stabilizer, flash bracketing, etc.
• [Image Stabilizer] (P. 53) turns off automatically.

Set the mode dial to A.
Tap the tab to display the live guides.
• Tap a guide item to display the slider of the level bar.
Tab
100% Wi-Fi

Guide item
100%

Change Color Saturation

ISO-A

200

250 F5.6

3

1:02:0338

Use your finger to position the sliders.
• Tap a to enter the setting.
• To cancel the live guide setting, tap k on thescreen.
• When [Shooting Tips] is selected, select an item andtap a to display a description.
• The effect of the selected level is visible in thedisplay.
If [Blur Background] or [Express Motions] is selected,
the display will return to normal, but the selected
effect will be visible in the final photograph.

Level bar/options
100%

Clear & Vivid

0

Flat & Muted

EN 31

2
Shooting
32 EN

4

To set multiple live guides, repeat Steps 2 and 3.

5

Shoot.

100%

Change Color Saturation• A check is displayed on the guide item for live guides
that are already set.

• To clear the live guides from the display, press the MENU button.

• [Blur Background] and [Express Motions] cannot be set at the same time.
• If [RAW] is currently selected for image quality, image quality will automatically be set to[YN+RAW].
• Live guide settings are not applied to the RAW copy.
• Pictures may appear grainy at some live guide setting levels.
• Changes to live guide setting levels may not be visible in the monitor.
• Frame rates drop when [Blurred Motion] is selected.
• The flash cannot be used when a live guide is set.
• Choosing live guide settings that exceed the limits of the camera exposure meters may
result in pictures that are overexposed or underexposed.

Using art filters
Using art filters, you can easily have fun with artistic effects.
Types of art filters
Creates an image that emphasizes the beauty of color.

Soft Focus

Creates an image that expresses a soft tone atmosphere.

Pale&Light Color I/II *Creates an image that expresses warm light by scattering
overall light and slightly overexposing the image.

Light Tone

Creates a high-quality image by softening both shadowsand highlights.

Grainy Film I/II *Creates an image that expresses the roughness of black
and white images.

Pin Hole I/II/III *Creates an image that looks as if it was taken using an oldor toy camera by dimming the image perimeter.

Diorama I/II *Creates a miniature-like image by emphasizing saturationand contrast, and blurring unfocused areas.

Cross Process I/II *Creates an image that expresses a surreal atmosphere.
Cross Process II creates an image that emphasizes
magenta.

Gentle Sepia

Creates a high-quality image by drawing out shadows andsoftening the overall image.

Dramatic Tone I/II *Creates an image that emphasizes the difference between
brightness and darkness by partially increasing contrast.

Key Line I/II *Creates an image that emphasizes edges and adds anillustrative style.

Watercolor I/II *Creates a soft, bright image by removing dark areas,
blending pale colors on a white canvas, and further
softening contours.

Vintage I/II/III *Expresses an everyday shot in a nostalgic, vintage tone
using printed film discoloration and fading.

Partial Color I/II/III *Impressively expresses a subject by extracting colors you
want to emphasize and keeping everything else monotone.

ART BKT (ART bracketing)

Records images using all art filter options with a single shot.
Press the INFO button on the selection screen to select afilter to record with.

2
Shooting

Pop Art I/II ** II and III are altered versions of the original (I).

EN 33

1

2
Shooting

2

Rotate the mode dial to ART.
• A menu of art filters will be displayed. Select a filter
using the rear dial.
• Use FG to choose an effect. The effects available
vary with the selected filter (Soft Focus Effect, Pin Hole
Effect, Frame Effect, White Edge Effect, Star Light
Effect, Color Filter, Monochrome Color, Blur Effect, or
Shade Effect).
• Press the Q button or press the shutter button halfway
to select the highlighted item and exit the art filter menu.

100%

ART
13

Vintage

Shoot.
• To choose a different setting, press the Q button to display the art filter menu.

• To maximize the benefits of the art filters, some of the shooting function settings are
disabled.
• If [RAW] is currently selected for image quality (P. 55, 88), image quality willautomatically be set to [YN+RAW]. The art filter will be applied to the JPEG copy only.
• Depending on the subject, tone transitions may be ragged, the effect may be lessnoticeable, or the image may become more “grainy.”• Some effects may not be visible in live view or during movie recording.
• Playback may differ according to the filters, effects, or movie quality settings applied.

Using [Partial Color]

100%

Record only selected hues in color.

34 EN

1
2
3

Rotate the mode dial to ART.

4

Rotate the front dial or rear dial to select a color.

5

Shoot.

Color

Select [Partial Color].
Highlight a type or effect and press the Q button.
• A color ring appears in the display.
• The effect is visible in the display.

Partial ColorCustom Modes (C1, C2, C3)
Save settings to each of three Custom Modes for instant recall.

• Different settings can be saved to C1, C2, and C3 using the [Reset / Custom Modes](P. 87) in W Shooting Menu 1.
• The settings for the selected Custom Mode will be recalled when you rotate the mode dial
to C1, C2, or C3.

2

Shooting with touch screen operations
T Tap a subject to focus and automatically release
the shutter. This function is not available in moviemode.
U Touch screen operations are disabled.
V Tap to display an AF target and focus on the subject
in the selected area. You can use the touch screen
to choose the position and size of the focus frame.
Photographs can be taken by pressing the shutter
button.

100%

Shooting

Tap T to cycle through touch screen settings.

Wi-Fi

ISO-A

200

250 F5.6

Previewing the subject (V)

1

30

100%

S-IS AUTO

Tap the subject in the display.
• An AF target will be displayed.
• Use the slider to choose the size of the frame.
• Tap S to turn off the display of the AF target.

1:02:03

14
10
ISO-A

200

7
5

Off

3x

250 F5.6

2

Use the slider to adjust the size of the AF
target, and then tap Y to zoom in at the frame
position.

100%• Use your finger to scroll the display when the
picture is zoomed in.
• Tap Z to cancel the zoom display.
• The situations in which touch screen operations are not available include the following.
During multiple exposure, on the one-touch capture white balance screen, whenbuttons or dials are in use• Do not touch the display with your fingernails or other sharp objects.
• Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.
• You can disable the touch screen operation. g [Touchscreen Settings] (P. 122)

EN 35

Recording movies
Use the R button to record movies.

1

2

Press the R button to begin recording.
• Movie you are recording will be displayed on the monitor.
• If you put your eye to the viewfinder, movie you are recording will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
• You can change the focus location by tapping the screen while recording.

Shooting

R button2

Press the R button again to end recording.

• When using a camera with a CMOS image sensor, moving objects may appear distorted
due to the rolling shutter phenomenon. This is a physical phenomenon whereby distortion
occurs in the filmed image when shooting a fast-moving subject or due to camera shaking.
In particular, this phenomenon becomes more noticeable when using a long focal length.
• If the size of the movie file being recorded exceeds 4 GB, the file will be split
automatically. (Depending on shooting conditions, movies under 4 GB in size may be split
into multiple files.)• When recording movies, use an SD card that supports an SD speed class of 10 or higher.
• A UHS-II or UHS-I card with a UHS speed class of 3 or better is required when a movie
resolution of [4K] or [C4K] or a bit rate of [A-I] (All-Intra) is selected in the [nK] menu.
• Choose an option other than U (multi echo) for [Movie Effect] (P. 37) when recording at amovie resolution of [4K] or [C4K].
• If the camera is used for extended periods, the temperature of the image pickup device
will rise and noise and colored fog may appear in images. Turn off the camera for a shorttime. Noise and colored fog may also appear in images recorded at high ISO sensitivity
settings. If the temperature rises further, the camera will turn off automatically.
• When using a Four Thirds system lens, the AF will not operate while recording movies.
• The R button cannot be used to record movies in the following instances:
During multiple exposure (still photography also ends.), while shutter button is pressedhalfway, during bulb/time/composite photography, during sequential shooting, during
time lapse shooting

36 EN

Using movie mode (n)With movie mode (n), you can create movies that take advantage of the effects
available in still photography mode. You can also apply an after-image effect or zoom
in on an area of the image during movie recording.
Adding effects to a movie [Movie Effect]

1
2

Rotate the mode dial to n.

3

Tap the on-screen icon of the effect you wish to use.

Press the R button to start shooting.
• Press the R button again to end shooting.

W

Art Fade

Films with the selected picture mode effect. The fadeeffect is applied to the transition between scenes.

M

Old Film

Randomly applies damage and dust-like noise similar toold movies.

U

Multi Echo

Applies an after-image effect. After-images will appear
behind moving objects.

T

One Shot Echo

Applies an after-image for a short time after you tap theicon. The after-image will disappear automatically after
a while.

X

Movie Teleconverter

Zooms in on an area of the image without using the lenszoom. The selected position of the image can be zoomedin even while the camera is kept fixed.

2
Shooting

You must first select [Movie Effect] on the screen that can be displayed by selecting theVideo Menu > [n Display Settings] > [n Info Settings] > [Custom1] and pressing I(P. 101).

Art Fade
Tap the icon. The effect will be applied gradually when you tap the icon of a picture mode.
Old Film
Tap the icon for the effect to be applied. Tap again to cancel the effect.
Multi Echo
Tap the icon for the effect to be applied. Tap again to cancel the effect.
One Shot Echo
Each tap of the icon adds the effect.
• Using the INFO button to change the information displayed in the monitor while data arebeing recorded cancels the selected [Movie Effect].

EN 37

Movie Tele-converter

2
Shooting

1

Tap the icon to display the zoom frame.

2

Tap M to zoom in on the area in the zoom frame.

3

Tap O or press the Q button to cancel the zoom frame and exit Movie
Tele-converter mode.

• You can change the position of the zoom frame by tapping the screen or using
FGHI.
• Press and hold the Q button to return the zoom frame to a central position.
• Tap N to return to the zoom frame display.

• The 2 effects cannot be applied simultaneously.
• Some effects may not be available depending on the picture mode.
• The sound of touch operations and button operations may be recorded.
• Art Fade cannot be used when shooting clips.
• When shooting slow/quick motion movies, you cannot use other movie effects than Movie
Tele-converter.
• The drive mode displayed in the movie mode is the setting for still image shooting. Still
image shooting is not available in the movie mode.
• The frame rate may drop if an art filter or a movie effect is used when a large image size
such as [4K] or [C4K] is set.
• Art filters are not available for slow/quick motion movies.
• Movie effects are not available for picture modes of movie and for slow/quick motion
movies.
• Movie Tele-converter is not available when [C4K] or [4K] is set for the image size.

Using the silencing function when shooting a movie
You can prevent the camera from recording operating sounds that occur due to camera
operations while shooting.
Silent shooting tab
The following functions are available as touch operations.
• Electronic zoom*1, recording volume, aperture, shutter
speed, exposure compensation, ISO sensitivity,
headphone volume*2*1 Only available with power zoom lenses*2 Only available when using headphones

Tap the silent shooting tab to display the function items.
After tapping an item, tap the displayed arrows to selectthe settings.
• The options available vary with the shooting mode.

38 EN

100%

L

00 R

TC 00:00:00:04 DF

n

250

42mm

00:04

28:56

Using various settings
Controlling exposure (Exposure F)
Rotate the front dial to choose exposure compensation. Choose positive (“+”) values tomake pictures brighter, negative (“–”) values to make pictures darker. Exposure can be
adjusted by ±5.0 EV.

2
Shooting

Negative (–)

No compensation (0)Positive (+)• Exposure compensation is not available in A.
• The viewfinder and live view display can only be changed up to ±3.0 EV. If the exposure
exceeds ±3.0 EV, the exposure bar will begin flashing.
• Movies can be corrected in a range up to ±3.0 EV.

Selecting the AF target mode (AF target settings)
You can change the target selection method and target size. You can also select Face
priority AF (P. 40).

1

Press the Fn1 button to display the AF target.

2

Use the front dial during AF target selection to choose a selection method.

• The AF target can also be displayed by pressing the arrow pad.

i

i

o

i

i

o (All Targets)

The camera automatically chooses from the full set of
focus targets.

I (Single Target)

You can choose a single AF target.

n (5-Target Group)

The camera automatically chooses from the targets inthe selected five-target group.

J (9-Target Group)

The camera automatically chooses from the targets inthe selected nine-target group.

• The single target mode is automatically applied in movie shooting if the group target modeis set.

EN 39

Setting the AF target
Select the single target or group target position.

2

1

Press the Fn1 button to display the AF target.

2

Use the arrow pad to position the AF target during AF target selection.

• The AF target can also be displayed by pressing the arrow pad.

Shooting• The size and number of the AF target changes depending on the [Digital Tele-converter](P. 88), [Image Aspect] (P. 54), and group target (P. 39) settings.
• Use the [N Custom Settings] (P. 112) in the custom menu to choose the roles of the dials
and FGHI during AF target selection.

Face priority AF/Eye priority AF
The camera detects faces and adjusts focus and digital ESP.

1

Press the Fn1 button to display the AF target.

2

Use the rear dial to select an option during AF
target selection.

Selected option• The AF target can also be displayed by pressing thearrow pad.
i

o

4
5

6

I

Face Priority On

N

Face Priority Off

Face priority is off.

K

Face & Eye Priority
On

The autofocus system selects the eye closest to thecamera for face-priority AF.

L

Face & R. Eye Priority The autofocus system selects the eye on the right forOnface-priority AF.

M

Face & L. Eye Priority The autofocus system selects the eye on the left for faceOnpriority AF.

Face priority is on.

Point the camera at your subject.
• If a face is detected, it will be indicated by a whiteframe.

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A

200

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• When the camera focuses on the face in the whiteframe, the frame will turn green.
• If the camera is able to detect the subject’s eyes, it will
display a green frame over the selected eye.
(eye priority AF)

LN
FHD F

60P

P

250 F5.6

0.0

1:02:03

1023

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A

Press the shutter button the rest of the way down
to shoot.

200

LN
FHD F

60P

P

250 F5.6

0.0

1:02:031023• Depending on the subject and the art filter setting, the camera may not be able to correctly
detect the face.

40 EN

• When set to [p (Digital ESP metering)] (P. 45, 51), metering is performed with priority given
to faces.
• Face priority is also available in [MF] (P. 43, 51). Faces detected by the camera are indicatedby white frames.

Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF (Super Spot AF)
You can zoom in on a portion of the frame when adjusting focus. Choosing a highzoom ratio allows you to use autofocus to focus on a smaller area than is normallycovered by the AF target. You can also position the focus target more precisely.

100%

S-IS AUTO

U

U

100%

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A

ISO-A

Shooting• To use Super Spot AF, you must first assign [U] to a button with Button Function (P. 66).

2

200

200

LN

LN

Off

FHD F

FHD F

60P

60P

250 F5.6 0.0

Shooting display

1:02:0330

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:0330

Zoom frame AF display

U

Zoom AF display

U (Press and hold) / Q

1

Press and release the U button to display the zoom frame.

2

Press and release the U button again to zoom in on the zoom frame.

3

Press the shutter button halfway to initiate autofocus.

• If the subject has been focused using autofocus immediately before the button ispressed, the zoom frame will be displayed at the current focus position.
• Use FGHI to position the zoom frame.
• Press the INFO button and use FG to choose the zoom ratio. (×3, ×5, ×7, ×10,
×14)
• Use FGHI to position the zoom frame.
• You can change the zoom ratio by rotating the front dial (r) or rear dial (o).
• The camera will focus using the subject in the frame at the center of the screen. Use
FGHI to choose a different focus position.

• Zoom is visible only in the monitor and has no effect on the resulting photographs.
• While zoomed in, a sound is made by the IS (Image Stabilizer).

EN 41

Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)Increasing ISO sensitivity increases noise (graininess) but allows photographs to betaken when lighting is poor. The setting recommended in most situations is [AUTO],
which starts at ISO 200—a value that balances noise and dynamic range—and thenadjusts ISO sensitivity according to shooting conditions.

2

1

Set the Fn lever to the position 2, and rotate the front dial to select a value.
• Exposure compensation can be adjusted by rotating the front dial in M mode.

Shooting

AUTO

The sensitivity is set automatically according to the shooting
conditions. The upper limit of ISO sensitivity and the shutter
speed to start raising the sensitivity can be set with [ISO-AutoSet] in Custom menu (P. 117).

LOW, 200–25600

The sensitivity is set to the selected value.

Adjusting color (WB (white balance))
White balance (WB) ensures that white objects in images recorded by the camera
appear white. [AUTO] is suitable in most circumstances, but other values can beselected according to the light source when [AUTO] fails to produce the desired results
or you wish to introduce a deliberate color cast into your images.

1

Set the Fn lever to the position 2, and rotate the rear dial to select a value.
• ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by rotating the rear dial in M mode.
Color
temperatureLight conditions

AUTO

—

For most light conditions (when there is awhite portion framed on the monitor). Use
this mode for general use.

55300 K

For shooting outdoors on a clear day,or to capture the reds in a sunset or thecolors in a fireworks display

N

7500 K

For shooting outdoors in the shadows on
a clear day

O

6000 K

For shooting outdoors on a cloudy day

13000 K

For shooting under a tungsten light>

4000 K

For shooting under a fluorescent light

U

—

n

5500 KWB modeAuto whitebalance

Preset whitebalance

42 EN

For underwater photography
For flash shooting

One-touch whitebalance

P/
Q/
W/
X

Press the INFO button to measure whitebalance using a white or gray target when
Color temperatureusing a flash or other light source of an
set by one-touch
unknown type or when shooting under
WB
mixed lighting. g “One-touch whitebalance” (P. 43)

Custom whitebalance

CWB

After pressing the INFO button, use HI
2000 K – 14000 K to select a color temperature and thenpress the Q button.

One-touch white balance
Measure white balance by framing a piece of paper or other white object under the lightingthat will be used in the final photograph. This is useful when shooting a subject under naturallight, as well as under various light sources with different color temperatures.

1

Select [P], [Q], [W], or [X] (one-touch white balance 1, 2, 3, or 4) andpress the INFO button.

2

Photograph a piece of colorless (white or gray) paper.

3

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

2• The new value is saved as a preset white balance option.
• The new value is stored until one-touch white balance is measured again. Turning thepower off does not erase the data.

Shooting• Frame the paper so that it fills the display and no shadows fall it.
• The one-touch white balance screen appears.

Choosing a focus mode (AF Mode)
You can select a focusing method (focus mode). You can choose separate focusing
methods for still photography mode and movie mode.

1
2

Press the AF m button.
Rotate the rear dial to select a value.

100%

HI

SH

ESP
S-AF

Single AF

P

AUTO
MF
S-AF C-AF

S-AF
MF

C-AF
TR

PreMF

S-AF
(Single AF)

The camera focuses once when the shutter button is pressedhalfway. When the focus is locked, a beep sounds, and the AF
confirmation mark and the AF target mark light up. This modeis suitable for taking pictures of still subjects or subjects withlimited movement.

C-AF(Continuous AF)

The camera repeats focusing while the shutter button remains
pressed halfway. When the subject is in focus, the AF
confirmation mark lights up on the monitor and the beep sounds
when the focus is locked at the first time.
Even if the subject moves or you change the composition of thepicture, the camera continues trying to focus.

MF(Manual focus)

This function allows you
to manually focus on any
position by operating the
focus ring on the lens.

Near)
Focus ring

S-AF+MF(Simultaneous use of
S-AF mode and MF
mode)

After pressing the shutter button halfway to focus in [S-AF]
mode, you can turn the focus ring to fine-adjust focus manually.

EN 43

C-AF+TR(AF tracking)Press the shutter button halfway to focus; the camera thentracks and maintains focus on the current subject while the
shutter button is held in this position.
• The AF target is displayed in red if the camera can no longer
track the subject. Release the shutter button and then frame
the subject again and press the shutter button halfway.
• Tracking range will be narrow when using a Four Thirds systemlens. Autofocus does not work while the AF target is displayed in
red even if the camera is tracking the subject.

PreMF(Preset MF)

The camera automatically focuses on the preset focus point
when shooting.

2
Shooting• The camera may be unable to focus if the subject is poorly lit, obscured by mist or smoke,or lacks contrast.
• When using a Four Thirds system lens, AF will not be available during movie recording.
• AF-mode selection is not available if the lens MF clutch is set to the MF position and[Operative] is selected for [MF Clutch] (P. 112) in Custom Menu.
Setting a focus position for PreMF

1
2
3

Select [Preset MF] for AF mode.

4

Press the Q button.

Press the INFO button.
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• Focus can be adjusted by rotating the focus ring.

• The PreMF function can be recalled by pressing the button to which [Preset MF] isassigned in [K Button Function]. Press the button again to return to the original AF.
• The distance for the preset focus point can be set with [Preset MF distance] in Custom
Menu (P. 112).

44 EN

Choosing how the camera measures brightness (Metering)
You can choose how the camera meters subject brightness.

1
2

Press the AF m button.
Rotate the front dial to select a value.

100%

HI

SH

ESP
S-AF

2

Single AF
AUTO
MF
S-AF C-AF

S-AF
MF

C-AF
TR

PreMF

p

Digital ESP
metering

Meters exposure in 324 areas of the frame and optimizes
exposure for the current scene or portrait subject (if an
option other than [OFF] is selected for [I Face Priority]).
This mode is recommended for general use.

H

Center weighted
averaging metering

Provides the average metering between thesubject and the background lighting, placing
more weight on the subject at the center.

I

Spot metering

Meters a small area (about 2% of the frame)with the camera pointed at the object you
wish to meter. Exposure will be adjusted
according to the brightness at the meteredpoint.

IHI

Spot metering(highlight)

Increases spot metering exposure. Ensures bright subjects
appear bright.

ISH

Spot metering(shadow)

Lowers spot metering exposure. Ensures dark subjects
appear dark.

Shooting

P• The spot metering position can be set at the selected AF target (P. 118).

Locking the exposure (AE Lock)
You can lock the exposure by pressing the AEL/AFL button. Use this when you wantto adjust the focus and exposure separately or when you want to shoot several images
at the same exposure.
• If you press the AEL/AFL button once, the exposure is locked and u is displayed.
g “AEL/AFL” (P. 123)
• Press the AEL/AFL button once again to release the AE Lock.
• The lock will be released if you operate the mode dial, MENU button, or Q button.

EN 45

Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting
You can take a series of pictures by keeping the shutter button pressed all the way
down. Alternatively, you can take pictures using the self-timer.

2

1
2

Press the jYHDR button.
Rotate the rear dial to select a value.

ShootingoSingle1 frame is taken at a time when the shutter button is pressed(normal shooting mode, single-frame shooting).

T

Sequential High

Pictures are taken at up to about 15 frames per second (fps)while the shutter button is pressed all the way down. Focus,
exposure, and white balance are fixed at the values for the
first shot in each series.

S

Sequential Low

Pictures are taken at up to about 10 frames per second (fps)while the shutter button is pressed all the way down. Focus
and exposure are fixed according to the options selected for[AF Mode] (P. 43, 51) and [AEL/AFL] (P. 123).

Y12s Y 12 sec

Press the shutter button halfway to focus, the rest of the way
down to start the timer. First, the self-timer lamp lights up for
approximately 10 seconds, then it blinks for approximately
2 seconds and the picture is taken.

Y2s

Y 2 sec

Press the shutter button halfway to focus, the rest of theway down to start the timer. The self-timer lamp blinks forapproximately 2 seconds, and then the picture is taken.

YC

Custom Self-timer

Press the INFO button to set [Y Timer], [Number ofFrames], [Interval Length], and [Every Frame AF].
Select a setting using HI, and adjust the setting by using
the rear dial (q).
If [Every Frame AF] is set to [On], each frame isautomatically focused before shooting.

♦S

Anti-ShockThe miniscule camera shaking caused by shutter
movements can be reduced during continuous shooting andself-timer shooting (P. 47).

♥S

SilentThe sound of the shutter can be muted during sequential
shooting and self-timer shooting (P. 47).

Pro Capture High

Sequential shooting begins when you press the shutter
button halfway. Press the shutter button all the way down
to begin recording captured images to the card, including
those for a halfway press (P. 48). Focus, exposure, and whitebalance are fixed at the values for the first shot in eachseries.

q

Pro Capture Low

Sequential shooting begins when you press the shutter
button halfway. Press the shutter button all the way down tobegin recording captured images to the card, including those
for a halfway press (P. 48). Focus and exposure are fixedaccording to the options selected for [AF Mode] (P. 43, 51) and[AEL/AFL] (P. 123).

hHigh Res Shot

Still pictures can be taken in a higher resolution (P. 48).

p

46 EN

2
Shooting• To cancel the activated self-timer, press G.
• Fix the camera securely on a tripod for self-timer shooting.
• If you stand in front of the camera to press the shutter button when using the self-timer,
the picture may be out of focus.
• When you are using S or q, live view is displayed. When you are using T or p, theimage shot immediately before is displayed.
• The speed of sequential shooting varies depending on the lens you are using and thefocus of the zoom lens.
• During sequential shooting, if the battery level icon blinks due to low battery, the camera
stops shooting and starts saving the pictures you have taken on the card. The camera
may not save all of the pictures depending on how much battery power remains.
• You can set unused functions not to be displayed in the options. g [j/Y Settings](P. 115)• The frame advance rate for sequential shooting drops when [ISO] is set to 8000 or higher.
The maximum frame advance rate in silent and pro-capture modes is 30 fps.
• Photographs taken in silent and pro-capture modes may be distorted if the subject orcamera moves quickly during shooting.

Shooting without the vibration caused by shutter button operations(Anti-Shock z)
To prevent camera shake caused by the small vibrations that occur during shutter
operations, shooting is performed using an electronic front-curtain shutter.
This is used when shooting with a microscope or a super telephoto lens.
You must first set [Anti-Shock z] in X Shooting Menu 2 to the settings other than [Off](P. 98).

1
2
3

Press the jYHDR button.
Select one of the items marked ♦ using the rear dial and press the Q button.
Shoot.
• When the set time has elapsed, the shutter is released and the picture is taken.

Shooting without shutter sound (Silent [♥])
In situations where the shutter sound is a problem, you can shoot without making
a sound. Shooting is performed using electronic shutters for both the front and rearcurtains so that the miniscule camera shaking caused by shutter movements can be
reduced, just as in anti-shock shooting.
You can change the time between the shutter button is pressed all the way down andthe shutter is released in [Silent [♥]] in X Shooting Menu 2. Set to [Off] to hide thissetting item (P. 98).

1
2
3

Press the jYHDR button.
Select one of the items marked ♥ using the rear dial and press the Q button.
Shoot.
• When the shutter is released, the monitor screen will go dark for a moment. No
shutter sound will be emitted.

• The desired results may not be achieved under flickering light sources such as fluorescentor LED lamps or if the subject moves abruptly during shooting.

EN 47

Shooting without a release time lag (Pro Capture shooting)2

To resolve the time lag from when you press the shutter button all the way down until
the recording of images starts, the sequential shooting using the electronic shutter
starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway and the recording of images including
those for a halfway press to the card starts when the shutter button is pressed all theway down.
p is good for subjects with minor changes in shooting distance, and q is good for
subjects with changes in shooting distance.

Shooting

1
2
3
4

Press the jYHDR button.
Select p or q using the rear dial and press the Q button.
Press the shutter button halfway to start shooting.
Press the shutter button all the way down to start recording to the card.

• Selecting q restricts aperture to values between maximum aperture and f8.0.
• Pro Capture shooting is not available when connected to Wi-Fi.
• Pro capture is available only with OLYMPUS Micro Four Thirds lenses.
• The camera will continue shooting for up to a minute while the shutter button is pressedhalfway. To resume shooting, press the button halfway again.
• Flickering occurred by fluorescent lights or the large movement of the subject, etc. may
cause distortions in images.
• The monitor will not be blacked out and the shutter sound will not be emitted whilebracketing.
• The slowest shutter speed is limited.
• The sequential shooting speed, the number of pre-captured images, and the shot limit canbe set in [0] of [jL Settings] or [jH Settings] (P. 114) in Custom Menu.
• The display refresh rate may drop below the value selected for [Frame Rate] (P. 115) in thecustom menu depending on subject brightness and the options selected for ISO sensitivity
and exposure compensation.
• Choosing p when [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected changes the autofocus mode (P. 43, 51)
to [S-AF].

Shooting still pictures in a higher resolution (High Res Shot)
When shooting an unmoving subject, you can shoot pictures in a higher resolution. A
high resolution image is recorded by shooting several times while moving the imaging
sensor. Attach the camera to a tripod or other stabilizing item and then shoot.
You can change the time between the shutter button is pressed all the way down andthe shutter is released in [High Res Shot] in X Shooting Menu 2. Set to [Off] to hide
this setting item (P. 99).
After setting high resolution shooting, you can select the image quality of the highresolution shooting using image quality mode (P. 55, 88).

1
2
3

48 EN

Press the jYHDR button.
Select h using the rear dial and press the Q button.
Shoot.
• If the camera is unstable, h will blink. Wait for the blinking to stop before shooting.
• Shooting is complete when the green h (high resolution) icon clears from thedisplay.

• Choose from JPEG ( 50M F or 25M F) and JPEG+RAW modes. When image quality is set to
RAW+JPEG, the camera saves a single RAW image (extension “.ORI”) before combining
it with the high resolution shooting. Pre-combination RAW images can be played backusing the latest version of OLYMPUS Viewer 3.
• Image quality may drop under flickering light sources such as fluorescent or LED lamps.
• [Image Stabilizer] (P. 53) is set to [Off].

Taking HDR (High Dynamic Range) images

1
2

Press the jYHDR button.

2
Shooting

The camera shoots several images and automatically combines them into an HDR
image. You can also shoot several images and perform HDR imaging on a computer(HDR bracketing photography).
Exposure compensation is available with [HDR1] and [HDR2] in P, A, and S modes.
In M mode, exposure can be adjusted as desired for HDR photography.

Rotate the front dial to select a setting.

HDR1
HDR2
3F 2.0EV
5F 2.0EV

Four shots are taken, each with a different exposure, and the shots are
combined into one HDR image inside the camera. HDR2 provides a more
impressive image than HDR1. ISO sensitivity is fixed to 200. Also, theslowest available shutter speed is 4 seconds and the longest available
exposure is 15 seconds.
HDR bracketing is performed. Select the number of images and theexposure difference.
HDR imaging processing is not performed.

7F 2.0EV
3F 3.0EV
5F 3.0EV

3

Shoot.
• When you press the shutter button, the camera automatically shoots the set numberof images.

• If you shoot with a slower shutter speed, there may be more noticeable noise.
• Attach the camera to a tripod or other stabilizing item and then shoot.
• The image displayed on the monitor or in the viewfinder while shooting will differ from the
HDR-processed image.
• In the case of [HDR1] or [HDR2], the HDR-processed image will be saved as a JPEG file.
When the image quality mode is set to [RAW], the image is recorded in RAW+JPEG.
• In the case of [HDR1] or [HDR2], the picture mode is fixed to [Natural] and the color
setting is fixed to [sRGB].
• Flash photography, bracketing, multiple exposure, and time lapse shooting cannot be
used at the same time as HDR photography.

EN 49

Setting in super control panel
Other main shooting functions can be set in the LV super control panel.
Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
Change settings using FGHI or touch operations.
LV super control panel

2

Super control panel

100%

1

Shooting

2
3
4
5
6

8

ISO
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

NaturalS +1+1

9Normal

0

+0.8

100%

ISO
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8

S-IS Auto
M-IS Auto7

H
F + RAWF

250 F5.6isRGB
FullHD0.0abc

1:02:03

1023

S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

0.0

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:031023

h gf e d

Settings that can be modified using LV super control panel
1 Currently selected option
2 ISO sensitivity .................................P. 51
3 K AF mode ...................................P. 51
AF target .........................................P. 40
4 Flash mode .....................................P. 57
5 Flash intensity control .....................P. 60
6 Image stabilizer...............................P. 53
7 K Save Settings ...........................P. 54
8 White balance .................................P. 52
White balance compensation..........P. 52
9 Picture mode...................................P. 61
0 Sharpness N..................................P. 62
Contrast u .....................................P. 62
Saturation t ..................................P. 63
Gradation z...................................P. 63
Color filter x ..................................P. 64
Monochrome color y.....................P. 64
Effect...............................................P. 65
Color*1.............................................P. 34
Color/Vivid*2 ....................................P. 71*1 Displayed when Partial Color is set.
*2 Displayed when Color Creator is set.

50 EN

a Color space.....................................P. 65
b Highlight & shadow control .............P. 66
c Button function assignment ............P. 66
d Aspect ratio .....................................P. 54
e nK..............................................P. 56
f Face priority ....................................P. 40
g Metering mode ................................P. 51
h KK .............................................P. 55
i Sequential shooting/Self-timer ........P. 54

Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)You can set the ISO sensitivity.
g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 42)

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [ISO].

ISO
100%

ISO
ISO
Auto

Use the front dial to select an option.

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural+1

S +1

Normal2+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:03

0.0

1023

Choosing a focus mode (AF Mode)

Shooting

1

You can select a focusing method (focus mode).
g “Choosing a focus mode (AF Mode)” (P. 43)

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [AF Mode].

AF Mode100%

K AF mode

ISO
Auto

Use the front dial to select an option.

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:03

0.0

1023

Choosing how the camera measures brightness (Metering)
You can choose how the camera meters subject brightness.
g “Choosing how the camera measures brightness (Metering)” (P. 45)

1
2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
Use FGHI to select [Metering].
Use the front dial to select an option.

100%

Metering
ISO
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

sRGB
FullHD

0.0

1:02:03

1023

Metering

EN 51

Adjusting color (WB (white balance))
You can set the white balance.
g “Adjusting color (WB (white balance))” (P. 42)

2
Shooting

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [WB].
Use the front dial to select an option.

WB
100%

WB
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:03

0.0

1023

Making fine adjustments to white balance (WB Compensation)
You can set and finely adjust the compensation values for both auto white balance andpreset white balance.

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3
4

Use FGHI to select [WB].

5

Use the front dial to select an option.
Use FGHI to select the white balancecompensation.

White balance compensation
100%

Auto
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

sRGB
FullHD

0.0

Change a flash compensation value using the frontdial.

For compensation on the A axis (Red-Blue)
Move the bar in the + direction to emphasize red tones and in the – direction toemphasize blue tones.
For compensation on the G axis (Green-Magenta)
Move the bar in the + direction to emphasize green tones and in the – direction toemphasize magenta tones.
• To set the same white balance in all white balance modes, use [All x] (P. 119).

52 EN

1:02:03

1023

Reducing camera shake (Image Stabilizer)
You can reduce the amount of camera shake that can occur when shooting in low lightsituations or shooting with high magnification.
The image stabilizer starts when you press the shutter button halfway.

1

Use FGHI to select the image stabilizer.
Use the front dial to select an option.

100%

IS Mode
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

H
F + RAWFn Image
Stabilizer

Movie(M-IS)Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS Auto

250 F5.6

Stillpicture(S-IS)

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

2

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:03

0.0

1023

K Image
Stabilizer

Shooting

2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

Image stabilizer is off.

OFF

Still-I.S. Off

S-IS
AUTO

Auto I.S.

S-IS1

All Direction
Shake I.S.

S-IS2

Vertical Shake Image stabilization applies only to vertical (Y)I.S.
camera shake.

S-IS3

Horizontal
Shake I.S.

OFF

Movie-I.S. Off

M-IS1

All Direction
Shake I.S.

The camera uses both sensor shift (VCM) andelectronic correction.

M-IS2

All Direction
Shake I.S.

The camera uses sensor shift (VCM) correction only.
Electronic correction is not used.

The camera detects the panning direction and applies
the appropriate image stabilization.
Image stabilizer is on.

Image stabilization applies only to horizontal (Z)camera shake. Use when panning the camera
horizontally with the camera held in portrait orientation.
Image stabilizer is off.

Using lenses other than Micro Four Thirds/Four Thirds System lenses
You can use focal length information to reduce camera shake when shooting with lenses thatare not Micro Four Thirds or Four Thirds system lenses.
• Set [Image Stabilizer], press the Q button, press the INFO button, then use FGHI toselect a focal length, and press the Q button.
• Choose a focal length between 0.1 mm and 1000.0 mm.
• Choose the value that matches the one printed on the lens.
• The image stabilizer cannot correct excessive camera shake or camera shake that occurs
when the shutter speed is set to the slowest speed. In these cases, it is recommended
that you use a tripod.
• When using a tripod, set [Image Stabilizer] to [OFF].
• When using a lens with an image stabilization function switch, priority is given to the lensside setting.
• When priority is given to the lens side image stabilization, [S-IS1] is used instead of [S-IS
AUTO].
• You may notice an operating sound or vibration when the image stabilizer is activated.

EN 53

Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting
You can take a series of pictures by keeping the shutter button pressed all the way
down. Alternatively, you can take pictures using the self-timer.
g “Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting” (P. 46 – 48).

1

2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

Shooting

2

Use FGHI to select the sequential shooting/self-timer.

3

Use the front dial to select an option.

100%

Sequential High
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:03

0.0

1023

Sequential shooting/self-timer

Setting the image aspect
You can change the aspect ratio (horizontal-to-vertical ratio) when taking pictures.
Depending on your preference, you can set the aspect ratio to [4:3] (standard), [16:9],[3:2], [1:1], or [3:4].

1
2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
Use FGHI to select [Image Aspect].
Use the front dial to select an option.

100%

Image Aspect
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:03

0.0

1023

Image Aspect• Image aspect can only be set for still images.
• JPEG images cropped to the selected aspect ratio are saved. RAW images are notcropped and are saved with the selected aspect ratio information.
• When RAW images are played back, the selected aspect ratio is shown by a frame.

Setting the saving method for shooting data (K Save Settings)
You can set how to record the shooting data to cards.

1
2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
Use FGHI to select [K Save Settings].
Select an item using the front dial.

100%

Save Settings
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

sRGB
FullHD

0.0

1:02:03

1023

K Save Settings

54 EN

y (Standard)This setting is applied if only one card with available space is in
the camera. If two cards with available space are in the camera,
images are recorded to the card specified in [K Save Slot] (P. 132).

z (Auto Switch)

When the card specified in [K Save Slot] is full, recording
switches to the other card (P. 132).

Images are recorded at the image quality mode specified for eachcard in slot 1 and 2 (P. 55, 88). Shooting will no longer be possible
when either of the cards becomes full. Note that the image quality
mode changes when [Dual independent 1] is selected; choose
the desired mode before proceeding.

2 (DualIndependent 3)

Images are recorded at the image quality mode specified for eachcard in slot 1 and 2 (P. 55, 88). When either of the cards becomes
full, recording switches to the card with available space. Note thatthe image quality mode changes when [Dual independent 3] isselected; choose the desired mode before proceeding.

3 (Dual Same 1)

Images are recorded at the same image quality mode for bothcards. Shooting will no longer be possible when either of the cards
becomes full.

4 (Dual Same 3)

Images are recorded at the same image quality mode for bothcards. When either of the cards becomes full, recording switches tothe card with available space.

2
Shooting

1 (DualIndependent 1)• If you press the Q button, you can specify the card to record the shooting data to with
[Card Slot Settings] of Custom Menu (P. 132).
• The image quality mode may change if you change the option selected for [K Save
Settings] or replace a memory card with one that can contain a different amount ofadditional photographs. Check the image quality mode before taking photographs.

Selecting image quality (KK)
You can set an image quality mode for still images. Select a quality suitable for theapplication (such as for processing on PC, use on website etc.). This can be set foreach card.

1
2

3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
Use FGHI to select [KK].
• Image quality mode can be set for each card slot. If[K Save Settings] is set to [Dual Independent 1] or[DualIndependent 3] separate image quality modes
can be set (P. 54).

100%

ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

0.0

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:031023

KK

Use the front dial to select an option.
• Choose from JPEG (YF, YN, XN, and WN) and RAW modes. Choose a JPEG+RAW
option to record both a JPEG and a RAW image with each shot. JPEG modes
combine image size (Y, X, and W) and compression ratio (SF, F, N, and B).
• When you want to select a combination other than YF, YN, XN, and WN, change the[K Set] (P. 119) settings in Custom Menu.
• During the high resolution shooting (P. 48), you can select between 50M F, 25M F,
50M F+RAW, and 25M F+RAW.
• Selecting [Dual independent 1] or [Dual independent 3] for [K Save Settings]
changes the image quality mode; choose the desired mode before proceeding.
• The image quality mode may change if you change the option selected for [K Save
Settings] or replace a memory card with one that can contain a different amount ofadditional photographs. Check the image quality mode before taking photographs.

EN 55

RAW image data
This format (extension “.ORF”) stores unprocessed image data for later processing. RAW
image data cannot be viewed using other cameras or software, and RAW images cannot
be selected for printing. JPEG copies of RAW images can be created using this camera.
g “Editing still images” (P. 105)2

Selecting image quality (nK)Shooting

You can set a movie record mode suitable for the desired use.
Set the card recording image quality mode for the card set as the movie recording
destination in [Card Slot Settings]. g “Setting the card to record to” (P. 132)

1
2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
Use FGHI to select [nK].

100%

n
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoosRGB
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

FullHD
1:02:03

0.0

1023

nK

3

Use the front dial to select an option.
• To change movie record mode settings, press Q followed by the INFO button androtate the rear dial.
Record mode

Application

Settings you can change

FHD F
30 (Full HD Fine 30p)*1

Shooting clips(P. 72)

Movie resolution, bit rate,
frame rate, recording time*4

Setting 1

Movie resolution, bit rate,
frame rate*4

Setting 2

Movie resolution, bit rate,
frame rate*4

Setting 3

Movie resolution, bit rate,
frame rate*4

Setting 4

Movie resolution, bit rate,
frame rate*4

CustomMovie resolution, bit rate,
frame rate, maximum clip
recording time, slow/quick
motion shooting*4

4K

30 (4K 30p)*1(Full HD Super Fine 60p)*1*2
FHD F
60 (Full HD Fine 60p)*1*2(Full HD Normal 60p)*1*2
C4K

24 (C4K 24p)*1

HD (1280×720, Motion JPEG)*3

Computerplayback or
editing—*1 File format: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264. The maximum size of individual file is limited to 4 GB.
The maximum recording time of individual movie is limited to 29 minutes.
*2 All-Intra refers to a movie recorded without inter-frame compression. Movies in this format
are suitable for editing but have a larger data size.
*3 The maximum size of individual file is limited to 2 GB.

56 EN

*4 The record mode can be set.
g [n Specification Settings] (P. 100)• Depending on the type of card used, recording may end before the maximum length isreached.
• Bit rate selection may be unavailable at some settings.

Using a flash (Flash photography)

12Remove the hot shoe cover and attach the flash to the camera.

Shooting• Slide the flash unit all the way in until it contacts the back of the shoe and is securely
in place.

Hot shoe cover

Changing orientation of the flash
You can change the vertical and horizontal orientation of
the flash unit. Bounce shooting is also possible.
• Note that when used for bounce photography the flash
may not fully illuminate the subject.

Removing the flash unit

UNLOCK switch

Remove the flash unit while pressing the UNLOCK switch.

2

1

EN 57

2

ON/OFF leverSet the flash ON/OFF lever to the ON position, andturn on the camera.
• When not using the flash, return the lever to the OFF
position.

2
Shooting

3
4

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
Use FGHI to select [Flash Mode].

100%

Flash Mode
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

sRGB
FullHD

0.0

1:02:03

1023

Flash Mode5

Use the front dial to select an option.
• The options available and the order in which they are displayed vary depending on
the shooting mode. g “Flash modes that can be set by shooting mode” (P. 59)
#
$
#!
#SLOW

!SLOW

Flash
Flash off

The flash fires regardless of the light conditions.
The flash does not fire.

Red-eye reduction flash

The flash fires so that the red-eye phenomenon
is reduced.

Slow synchronization(1st curtain)
Slow synchronization(1st curtain)/Red-eye
reduction flash

The flash fires with slow shutter speeds tobrighten dimly-lit backgrounds.
The slow synchronization is combined with the
red-eye reduction flash.

#SLOW2

Slow synchronization(2nd curtain)

The flash fires immediately
before the shutter closes tocreate trails of light behindmoving light sources.

#FULL,#1/4 etc.

Manual flash

For users who prefer manual operation. If youpress the Q button followed by the INFO
button, you can use the dial to adjust the flash
level.

• In [#! (Red-eye reduction flash)], after the pre-flashes, it takes about 1 second before
the shutter is released. Do not move the camera until shooting is complete.
• [#! (Red-eye reduction flash)] may not work effectively under some shooting
conditions.
• When the flash fires, the shutter speed is set to 1/250 seconds or slower. When shooting a
subject against a bright background with the flash, the background may be overexposed.
• The sync speed for silent mode and focus bracketing (P. 94) is 1/50 second. The sync
speed at ISO sensitivities of 8000 and above and during ISO bracketing (P. 94) is 1/20
second.

58 EN

Flash modes that can be set by shooting mode
Shooting
mode

S/M

*

Flash mode

#

Flash

#!

Red-eyereduction$

Flash off

!
SLOW

Slow
synchronization(red-eyereduction flash)

#SLOW

Slow
Synchronization(1st curtain)

#
SLOW2

Slow
synchronization(2nd curtain)FlashtimingConditions forfiring the flash

Shutter speed
limit

1st
curtain

Always fires

1/30 sec. –1/250 sec.*

—

—

—

Always fires

60 sec. – 1/250 sec.*

1stcurtain

Always fires

60 sec. – 1/250 sec.*

30 sec. – 1/250 sec.*

1stcurtain2
Shooting

P/A

LV supercontrolpanel

2nd
curtain

#

Flash

#!

Red-eyereduction flash$

Flash off

—

—

—

#
SLOW2

Slow
synchronization(2nd curtain)

2nd
curtain

Always fires

60 sec. – 1/250 sec.*• Only # and $ can be set in A mode.
The shutter speed is 1/250 seconds when using a separately sold external flash.

Minimum range
Approximate distance atLens
which vignetting occurs
The lens may cast shadows over
objects close to the camera,
ED 12-40mm f2.8 PRO
0.6 m
causing vignetting, or the flash
ED 40-150mm f2.8 PRO
0.6 m
may be too bright even atminimum output.
• External flash units can be used to prevent vignetting. To prevent photographs from being
overexposed, select A or M mode, and choose a high aperture value or reduce ISO
sensitivity.

EN 59

Adjusting flash output (Flash intensity control)
Flash output can be adjusted if you find that your subject is overexposed, or isunderexposed even though the exposure in the rest of the frame is appropriate.

1

2
Shooting
60 EN

2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
Use FGHIto select [w].
Use the front dial to select an option.

100%

ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

0.0

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:031023

w• This setting has no effect when the flash control mode for the external flash unit is set to
MANUAL.
• Changes to flash intensity made with the external flash unit are added to those made withthe camera.

Processing options (Picture Mode)
You can select a picture mode and make individual adjustments to contrast, sharpness,and other parameters (P. 62). Changes to each picture mode are stored separately.

Picture mode options
Produces more impressive-looking results suited to the scene.
Produces vivid colors.

C Natural

Produces natural colors.

D MutedProduces flat tones.

E Portrait

Produces beautiful skin tones.

J

Monochrome

Produces black and white tone.

K

Custom

Use to select one picture mode, set the parameters, andregister the setting.

v

e-Portrait

Produces smooth skin textures. This mode cannot be usedwith bracket photography or when shooting movies.

F Underwater

Produces vivid color finish perfect for underwater photos.
• When [F Underwater] is set, it is recommended that you
set [# + WB] to [Off] (P. 119).

cColor Creatore

Pop Artf

Soft Focus

g

Pale&Light ColorhLight Tonei

Grainy Filmj

Pin HolekDioramal

Cross Processm

Gentle SepianDramatic Toneo

Key Linep

Watercolorq

Vintager

Partial Color

2
Shooting

A i-Enhance
B Vivid

Provides a color finish set in Color Creator (P. 71).

Uses Art Filter settings. Art effects can also be used.

EN 61

1
2
3

2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

Picture Mode100%

Picture Mode

Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
Use the front dial to select an option.

Shooting• The items available for picture mode differ dependingon the shooting mode (P. 24).
• You can set unused picture modes not to be displayedin the options. g [Picture Mode Settings] (P. 115)
Some picture modes cannot be hidden.

ISO
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

WB
Auto

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWFsRGB
FullHD
1:02:03

0.0

250 F5.6

1023

Making fine adjustments to sharpness (Sharpness)
In the picture mode (P. 61) settings, you can make fine adjustments to sharpness andstore the changes.
• Adjustments may not be available depending on the shooting mode (P. 24).

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHIto select [Sharpness].

Sharpness
100%

SharpnessISO
Auto

Use the front dial to select an option.

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:03

0.0

1023

Making fine adjustments to contrast (Contrast)
In the picture mode (P. 61) settings, you can make fine adjustments to contrast and store
the changes.
• Adjustments may not be available depending on the shooting mode (P. 24).

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHIto select [Contrast].
Use the front dial to select an option.

Contrast
100%

Contrast
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

62 EN

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal

+0.8

0.0

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:031023

Making fine adjustments to saturation (Saturation)
In the picture mode (P. 61) settings, you can make fine adjustments to saturation andstore the changes.
• Adjustments may not be available depending on the shooting mode (P. 24).

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select a [Saturation].
Use the front dial to select an option.

Saturation
100%

Saturation
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1
Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

2

S +1

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:03

0.0

1023

Shooting

1

Making fine adjustments to tone (Gradation)
In the picture mode (P. 61) settings, you can make fine adjustments to tone and store thechanges.
• Adjustments may not be available depending on the shooting mode (P. 24).

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to [Gradation].

Gradation
100%

Use the front dial to select an option.

Gradation
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

0.0

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:03

1023

AUTO: Auto

Divides the image into detailed regions and adjusts the brightness
separately for each region. This is effective for images with areasof large contrast in which the whites appear too bright or the blacks
appear too dark.

NORM: Normal

Use the normal mode for general uses.

HIGH: High Key

Uses a tone suitable for a bright subject.

LOW: Low Key

Uses a tone suitable for a dark subject.

EN 63

Applying filter effects to monochrome pictures (Color Filter)In the monochrome setting of picture mode (P. 61) settings, you can add and store a filter
effect in advance. This creates a monochrome image in which the color matching thefilter color is brightened and the complementary color is darkened.

2
Shooting

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3
4

Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
Select [Monochrome] using the front dial.
Use FGHI to select [Color Filter].

Color Filter
100%

Color Filter
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

+0.8

Monochrome
+1

S +1
F N

S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

5

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

NormalT N
sRGB

FullHD
1:02:030.0

1023

Select an item using the front dial.

N:NoneCreates a normal black and white image.

Ye:Yellow

Reproduces clearly defined white cloud with natural blue sky.

Or:Orange

Slightly emphasizes colors in blue skies and sunsets.

R:Red

Strongly emphasizes colors in blue skies and brightness of crimson
foliage.

G:Green

Strongly emphasizes colors in red lips and green leaves.

Adjusting the tone of a monochrome image (Monochrome Color)
In the monochrome setting of picture mode (P. 61) settings, you can add and store acolor tint in advance.

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3
4

Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
Select [Monochrome] using the front dial.
Use FGHI to select [Monochrome Color].

Monochrome Color100%

Monochrome Color
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

+0.8

64 EN

Use the front dial to select an option.

N:NoneCreates a normal black and white image.

S:Sepia

Creates a sepia image.

B:BlueCreates a bluish image.

P:Purple

Creates a purplish image.

G:GreenCreates a greenish image.

Monochrome
+1

S +1
F N

S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

5

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

0.0

NormalT N
sRGB

FullHD
1:02:031023

Adjusting i-Enhance effects (Effect)
You can set the i-Enhance effect strength in picture mode (P. 61).

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2
3

Use FGHI to select [Effect].

Effect100%

EffectISO
Auto

Use the front dial to select an option.

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

+0.8

i-Enhance+1

S +1

NormalStandard

H
F + RAWF

250 F5.62

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:03

0.0

1023

r (Effect: Low)

Adds a low i-Enhance effect to images.

s (Effect: Standard)

Adds an i-Enhance effect between “low” and “high” to images.

t (Effect: High)

Adds a high i-Enhance effect to images.

Shooting

S-IS Auto
M-IS Auto

Setting the color reproduction format (Color Space)
You can select a format to ensure that colors are correctly reproduced when shot
images are regenerated on a monitor or using a printer. This option is equivalent to the[Color Space] (P. 119) in Custom Menu.

1
2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
Use FGHI to select [Color Space].
Use the front dial to select an option.

100%

Color Space
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:03

0.0

1023

Color Space

sRGB

This is the RGB color space standard stipulated by the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
Normally, use [sRGB] as the standard setting.

AdobeRGB

This is a standard provided by Adobe Systems.
Compatible software and hardware such as a display, printer etc.
are required for a correct output of images.

• [AdobeRGB] is not available in movie mode or with ART (P. 33) or HDR

EN 65

Changing the brightness of highlights and shadows(Highlight&Shadow)
Use [Highlight&Shadow] to adjust the brightness of highlights and shadows.

1

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

2

100%

Highlight&Shadow
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS Auto

Shooting

H
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

sRGB
FullHD
1:02:030.0

1023

Highlight&Shadow

2 Use FGHI to select [Highlight&Shadow], then press the Q button.
3 Use the rear dial to adjust shadows and the front
100%

HighLight+2

dial to adjust highlights.

• Settings can be reset by pressing and holding the Q
button.
Press the INFO button to view the mid-tone adjustment
display.

Shadow+2

MidtoneRESET• The [Highlight&Shadow] can also be accessed via the button to which [Highlight&Shadow
control] has been assigned using [Multi Function] option (P. 68).

Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)
At default settings, the following functions are assigned to the buttons:
ButtonDefault

Default

U Function

AF Area Select8 Function# (Still picture),
Electronic Zoom*(Movie)V Function

Multi Function

u Function

j/Y (still picture),kISO/jWB(Movie)R Function

R REC

m Function

AF Area Selectt Function

AEL/AFLn Function

AEL/AFLY Functionk (Still picture),
Peaking (Movie)

v Function

AF Area Select(Still picture), Direct
Function (Movie)

Z Functionz (Still picture),
U (Movie)

w Function# (Still picture),
Electronic Zoom*(Movie)u Functionux Function

j/Y (still picture),
ISO/WB (Movie)u Function

AF Area Select(Still picture), Direct
Function (Movie)l Function

AF Stop* Only available with power zoom lenses

66 EN

ButtonTo change the function assigned to a button, follow the steps below.

1
2

Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.

100%

Button Function

Use FGHI to select [K Button Function] or[n Button Function] , then press the Q button.

ISO
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoH
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

sRGB
FullHD

0.0

1:02:03

1023

Button Function

Use the rear dial to select a button.
Rotate the front dial to switch the setting screen,
then use the rear dial to select an option and press
the Q button.

2
Shooting• [K Button Function] of Custom Menu (P. 113) is displayedin still image shooting mode, and [n Button Function]of [n Button/Dial/Lever] (P. 100) is displayed in movie
mode.

3
4

WB
Auto

• The options available vary from button to button.
AF StopPress the button to stop autofocus.

t (AEL/AFL)

Press the button to use AE lock or AF lock. The functionchanges according to the [AEL/AFL] (P. 123) setting. When
AEL is selected, press the button once to lock the exposureand display u on the monitor. Press the button again tocancel the lock.

R REC

Press the button to record a movie.

z (Preview)

Aperture is stopped down to the selected value while thebutton is pressed.
If [On] is selected for [z Lock] in [z Settings] of Custom
Menu (P. 116), the aperture is held at the selected value evenwhen the button is released.

k (One-touch whitebalance)

Press the shutter button while the button is pressed toacquire a white balance value (P. 43).

N (AF Area Select)Press the button to choose the AF target (P. 39, 40).

N p (N Home)

Press the button to select the AF home position saved with
[N Set Home] (P. 112). Press the button again to return tothe original position. If the camera is turned off when thehome position is selected, the AF target position set before
the home position is selected will be reset.

MF

Press the button to select [MF] mode. Press the button
again to restore the previously selected AF mode. You
can switch the focusing mode by rotating the dial whilepressing the button.

RAW K

Press the button to toggle between JPEG and RAW+JPEG
image quality modes. You can switch the image quality
mode by rotating the dial while pressing the button.

K TEST (Test Picture)

Press the shutter button while the button is pressed todisplay taken pictures without recording to the memory
card.

EN 67

I/H (Underwater wide/
Underwater macro)2
Shooting
68 EN

When using a waterproof protector, press the button toswitch between I and H. Press and hold the button
to return to the original shooting mode. When using alens with an electronic zoom, switching between I and
H is automatically set to the wide-angle setting and thetelephoto setting.

F (Exposurecompensation)

Press the button to adjust exposure compensation.
If you press the button while in P, A, or S modes, you canadjust exposure compensation with the dial or HI.
If you press the button while in M mode, you can change
the shutter speed and aperture value with the dial or
FGHI.

b (Digital Tele-converter)

Press the button to turn digital zoom [On] or [Off].

D (Keystone Comp.)

Press the button once to display options for keystonecompensation and again to save changes and exit. To
resume normal photography, press and hold the button.

U (Magnify)

Press the button to display the magnification frame andpress it again to magnify the image. Press and hold the
button to cancel magnified display.

HDR

Press the button to switch to HDR shooting with the saved
settings. Press the button again to cancel HDR shooting.
You can switch the HDR mode by rotating the dial whilepressing the button.

BKT

Press the button to switch to BKT shooting with the saved
settings. Press the button again to cancel BKT shooting.
You can switch the BKT mode by rotating the dial whilepressing the button.

kISO/jWB

Press the button to adjust ISO sensitivity using the front
dial and white balance using the rear dial.

kWB/jISO

Press the button to adjust white balance using the front dial
and ISO sensitivity using the rear dial.

Multi Function

To recall the selected multi function, press the button towhich [Multi Function] has been assigned. g “Using
multi function options (Multi Function)” (P. 70)

Peaking

Press the button to turn on and off the peaking display.
When peaking is displayed, histogram and highlight/
shadow display are not available.
When using peaking, you can change colors and emphasis
by pressing the INFO button.

V Level Disp

Press the button to display the level gauge in the
viewfinder and press it again to turn off the level gauge.
The level gauge is available when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is
set in [EVF Style] (P. 133).

u (u View Selection)

Press this button to turn on and off the live view. If the eye
sensor is disabled, it switches between monitor display and
EVF display.

n (S-OVF)

Press the button to display an image in the viewfinder aswill be displayed in thean optical viewfinder image.
viewfinder. Press the button to end [S-OVF].

Press the button to turn on and off the AF Limiter. You
can switch the AF Limiter mode by rotating the dial whilepressing the button.

Preset MF

Press the button to switch to Preset MF. Press the button
again to return to the original AF setting. You can switch
the focusing mode by rotating the dial while pressing the
button.

s Lens (Lens Info
Settings)

Press the button to display the lens information settings
menu (P. 132).

IS ModePress the button to turn on and off the image stabilization.
You can switch the image stabilization mode by rotating thedial while pressing the button.

# (Flash Mode)

Press the button to choose a flash mode.
You must first set [u Function] to [Direct Function].

j/YPress the button to choose a sequential shooting or selftimer option.
You must first set [u Function] to [Direct Function].

G (Switch G Lock)

Press and hold the button to enable and disable touch
screen operation.
You must first set [u Function] to [Direct Function].

Electronic Zoom

When using a lens with a power zoom function, afterpressing the button, use the arrow pad for zooming
operations.
You must first set [u Function] to [Direct Function].

2
Shooting

AF Limiter• To use [8 Function] and [u Function] options, you will first have to select [Direct
Function] for [u Function].
• To use [w Function] and [x Function] options, you will first have to select [Direct
Function] for [v Function].
• The [Direct Function] option for u button applies to each of FGHI.
• Assign N to the u button to use it for AF target selection.
• The l button can be used for the functions available on some lenses.
• The multi-function button can be assigned the following roles:b (Highlight&Shadow Control), c (Color Creator), e (ISO/WB), f (WB/ISO),U (Magnify), d (Image Aspect), n (S-OVF), 2 (Peaking)

EN 69


Using multi function options (Multi Function)
Multiple functions can be assigned to a button by setting [Multi Function] to the button
in [K Button Function] or [n Button Function]. At default settings, multi function is
assigned to the Fn2 button.
Choosing a function

2

1

Shooting

2

Press and hold the Fn2 button and rotate the front or rear dial.
• The menus are displayed.

100%

Keep rotating the dial to choose a function.
• Release the button when the desired function is
selected.
Highlight&Shadow Control

P

Using the selected function
Press the Fn2 button. The function setting screen will be displayed.

When [U] is assigned to the Fn2 button

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO
200

Fn2

Press and hold
Q/Fn2

Fn2
100%

100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO
200

LN

LN

Off

FHD F

FHD F

60P

250 F5.6

0.0

60P

1:02:03

250 F5.6

38
30

Shooting display

1:02:03

0.0

38
30

Zoom frame AF
display

Zoom AF display

When other options are assigned to the Fn2 button
100%

HighLight+2

100%

100%

Color

ViVid±0

Shadow+2

MidtoneRESETHighlight&Shadow
Control screen

70 EN

RESET

Color Creator screen

4:3

P

Aspect ratio setting
screenFunctionb (Highlight&Shadow Control) (P. 66)

Front dial (r)Rear dial (o)Highlight control

Shadow control

Hue

Saturationc (Color Creator) (P. 71)
e (ISO/WB) (P. 42, 51/P. 42, 52)

ISO sensitivity

WB modef (WB/ISO)* (P. 42, 52/P. 42, 51)

WB modeISO sensitivity

U (Magnify) (P. 41)
d (Image Aspect) (P. 54)

2

Zoom AF: Zoom in or out
Aspect ratio—

2 (Peaking) (P. 124)—

Shootingn (S-OVF) (P. 121)* The function is displayed when it is selected in [Multi Function Settings] (P. 115).

Adjusting overall color (Color Creator)
The overall color of the image can be adjusted using any combination of 30 hues and 8
saturation levels.
You must first set Color Creator to the Fn2 button (P. 70).

1

Press the Fn2 button.

100%• The setting screen will be displayed.

Color

ViVid±0
RESET

2

Set hue using the front dial and saturation using the rear dial.

3

Press the Q button.

• Settings can be reset by pressing and holding the Q button.
• To exit without setting the Color Creator, press the MENU button.
• To return to the Color Creator setting screen, press the Fn2 button.

• Photos are recorded in RAW+JPEG format when [RAW] is selected for image quality (P. 55,
88).
• Pictures taken using [HDR] (P. 49, 95) or [Multiple Exposure] (P. 95) are recorded at the[Natural] setting.

EN 71

Shooting “My Clips”
You can create a single My Clips movie file including multiple short movies (clips). You
can also add still pictures to the My Clips movie.
Shooting

2
Shooting

1
2
3

Set the mode dial to n.
Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
Use FGHI to select [nK].

100%

n
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoosRGB
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

4

Select FHD30F

5

Press the R button to start shooting.

6

Press the R button to shoot the next clip.

FullHD

0.0

1:02:031023

using the front dial and press the Q button.

• Press the INFO button to change [Movie Resolution], [Bit Rate], [Frame Rate], and[Clip Recording Time]. Highlight [Movie Resolution], [Bit Rate], [Frame Rate], or [ClipRecording Time] using HI and use FG to change.

• The recording ends automatically when the preset shooting time has elapsed, anda screen for checking the recorded movie is displayed. Press the Q button to start
shooting the next one.
• If you press the R button again during shooting, the shooting will continue while thebutton is held down (up to a maximum of 16 seconds).
• The confirmation screen will disappear and shooting of the next clip will start.
• To delete the clip you have shot or save it in a different My Clips, perform thefollowing on the confirmation screen.
F

Plays back My Clips from the beginning.

G

Changes My Clips to save the clip to and the position to add the clip
to. Use HI to change the position to add the clip to in the My Clips.



Deletes the shot clip.

• The shooting of the next clip can be started by pressing the shutter button halfway.
The clip is saved in the same My Clips as the previous clip.
• Clips with different [Movie Resolution], bit rate, and [Frame Rate] settings are saved
as separate My Clips.

72 EN

Creating new My Clips
Move a clip to v using FG, and press the Q button.

Add to a new My Clips folder.

100%

23 11:24 MOV FullHD23 11:24 MOV FullHD

Back

2

Set

Shooting

Removing a clip from My Clips
Move a clip to n using FGHI, and press the Q button.
• The clip removed from My Clips will be a normal movie file.

Playback
You can play back the files in My Clips consecutively.

1
2

Press the q button and select an image marked c.
Press the Q button and select [Play My Clips] using FG. Then press the
Q button again.
• The files in My Clips will play back consecutively.
• Press the Q button to end the consecutive playback.

Editing “My Clips”
You can create a single movie file from My Clips.
The shot clips are stored in My Clips. You can add movie clips and still pictures to My
Clips. You can also add screen transition effects and art filter effects.

1
100%

Press the q button and then rotate the rear dial to play back My Clips.

q

Wi-Fi

L N 100-0020
2017.01.01 12:30:00

Single-frame
playback

20

p

q

100%

2017.01.01 12:30:00

Index display

21

p

100%

11:23 MOV

FHD

30p

11:24 MOV

FHD

30p

12:12 MOV

FHD

30p

2017.01.01 12:30:00

My Clips playbackqp2017.1

100%

Sun

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

27

28

22

23

24

25

26

29

30

31

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Calendar display

Q• Images marked with c in the My Clips playback display can be viewed by pressing
the q button, highlighting the image, and pressing Q button.

2

Use FG to select My Clips and HI to select a clip, and press the Q
button.

EN 73

3

2

Select an item using FG and press the Q button.

Play My Clips

Plays back the files in My Clips in order, starting from the
beginning.

Movie IntervalPlays back the selected clips as movie.

Rearrange Order

Moves or adds files in My Clips.

Preset Destination

From the next time you shoot, movies shot in the samesettings will be added to this c My Clips.

Shooting

Delete My Clips

Deletes all unprotected files from My Clips.

Erase

Select [Yes] and press the Q button to delete.

4

Display My Clips from which you wish to create the movie. Select [Export My
Clips] and press the Q button.

5

Select an item using FG and press the Q button.

Clip Effects

You can apply 6 types of art effects.

Transition Effect

You can apply fade effects.

BGM

You can set [Party Time] or [Off].

Recorded Clip Volume

When [BGM] is set to [Party Time], you can set a volume forsounds recorded in the movie.

Recorded Clip Sound

By setting to [On], you can create a movie with the recorded
sound. This setting is only available when [BGM] is set to[Off].

Preview

You can preview the files of the edited My Clips in order,
starting from the first file.

6

When you have finished the editing, select [Begin Export] and press the Q
button.
• The combined album is saved as a single movie.
• Exporting a movie may take some time.
• The maximum length for My Clips is 15 minutes and the maximum file size is 4 GB.

• It may take a while for My Clips to display after taking out, inserting, erasing, or protecting
the card.
• You can record a maximum of 99 My Clips and a maximum of 99 cuts per clip. The
maximum values may vary depending on the file size and length of My Clips.
• You cannot add movies other than clips to My Clips.
• You can change [Party Time] to different BGM. Record the data downloaded from the
Olympus website onto the card, select [Party Time] from [BGM] in step 5, and press I.
Visit the following website for the download.
http://support.olympus-imaging.com/bgmdownload/

74 EN

Shooting slow/quick motion movies
You can create slow motion or quick motion movies. You can set the recording speed
using nc in record mode.

1
2
3

Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
Use FGHI to select [nK].
C4K• The option selected for [Slow or Fast Motion] can bechanged by pressing the INFO button. In HI, select[Slow or Fast Motion] and then press FG to select amagnification factor and press the Q button. Increase
the multiplication factor to shoot a quick motion movie.
Reduce the multiplication factor to shoot a slow motion
movie. The frame rate changes accordingly.

4

2

100%

n
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS AutoosRGB
F + RAWF

250 F5.6

0.0

FullHD
1:02:03

1023

Shooting

Use the front dial to select 24 (custom recordmode) (P. 56), then press the Q button.

Press the R button to start shooting.
• Press the R button again to end shooting.
• The movie will be played back at a fixed speed so that it appears to be in slow motion
or quick motion.

• Sound will not be recorded.
• Any picture mode art filters will be canceled.
• Either or both of slow motion and quick motion cannot be set for some options of [nK].
• The shutter speed is limited to values faster than 1/24 seconds when using autofocus.
This limitation will not be applied when using manual focus.
• The shutter speed is limited to values faster than 1/24 seconds when using P, A, or S
mode in movie shooting.
• When using M mode in movie shooting, the shutter speed is limited according toautofocus or manual focus. The focus mode cannot be switched from manual toautofocus.

EN 75

3 Playback
Information display during playback
Playback image information

3

Simplified display

1

34

2

Playback

100%

Wi-Fi

×10

d

f

5 6 7 89

100-0015

4:3

2017.01.01 12:30:00

15

e d c

0
a

b

Overall display

g
100%

h

i

jk

Wi-Fi

×10
250

P

F5.6

+2.0

45mm

+10

+1.0

A+4
ISO 400

G+4
Adobe

AF
WB
AUTO

Natural5184×3888d2017.01.01 12:30:00

x

76 EN

w v uts

4:3

1/8
100-0015
15

l
m
n
o
p
q
r

3
Playback

g Aspect border .................................P. 54
h AF area pointer ...............................P. 40
i Shooting mode......................... P. 24–37
j Exposure compensation .................P. 39
k Shutter speed .......................... P. 26–29
l Aperture value ......................... P. 26–29
m Focal lengthn Flash intensity control .....................P. 60
o White balance compensation..........P. 52
p Color space.....................................P. 65
q Picture mode.............................P. 61, 88
r Compression rate .........................P. 131
s Pixel count ....................................P. 131
t ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 42, 51
u White balance ...........................P. 42, 52
v Focus adjustment .........................P. 112
w Metering mode ..........................P. 45, 51
x Histogram .......................................P. 23

1 Battery level ....................................P. 18
2 Wireless LAN connection......P. 134–138
3 Including GPS information ............P. 137
4 Eye-Fi upload complete ................P. 122
5 Print order
Number of prints ...........................P. 144
6 Share order .....................................P. 82
7 Sound record ..........................P. 83, 107
8 Protect ............................................P. 81
9 Image selected ...............................P. 82
0 File number ...................................P. 120
a Frame numberb Slot selected for playback ...............P. 78
c Image quality ............................P. 55, 88
d Aspect ratio .....................................P. 54
e dFocus Stacking/m p HDR image .................P. 49, 95
f Date and time .................................P. 19

Switching the information display
You can switch the information displayed during playback
by pressing the INFO button.
INFO button

100%

INFO

Wi-Fi

×10

d

4:3

2017.01.01 12:30:00

100-0015
15

INFO

Simplified display

100%

100%

Wi-Fi

×10
250

P

F5.6

+2.0
AF

A+4
ISO 400

INFO
Image only

45mm

+10

WB
AUTO

+1.0
G+4
Adobe
Natural5184×3888
d 4:3

1/8
100-0015

2017.01.01 12:30:00

15

Overall display• You can add histogram, highlight & shadow, and Light Box to the information displayed
during playback. g [q Info] (P. 127)

EN 77

Viewing photographs and movies

1

3

Press the q button.
• Your most recent photograph or movie will be displayed.
• Select the desired photograph or movie using the front dial (r) or arrow pad.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.

% TipsPlayback• To change the playback card, while pressing the q button, turn the dial to select a slot,
then release the q button. The playback card setting will return to the original setting
once the camera exits the playback mode. The change of playback card by this operation
does not affect the [q Slot] setting of [Card Slot Settings] (P. 132).
Front dial

100%

Wi-Fi

Displays the Displays
previous the next
frame frame
L N 100-0020
2017.01.01 12:30:00

20

Still image
100%

Wi-Fi

P
HD

WB
AUTO

100-0004

2017.01.01 12:30:00

q button

4

Movie

Rear dial (o)Zoom in (p)/Index (q)Front dial (r)Previous (t)/Next (s)Operation also available during close-up playback.

Single-frame playback: Next (I)/previous (H)/playback volume(FG)
Close-up playback: Changing the close-up position
You can display the next frame (I) or the previous frame (H)Arrow pad (FGHI)
during close-up playback by pressing the INFO button.
Press the INFO button again to display a zoom frame and use
FGHI to change its position.
Index/My Clips/calendar playback: Highlight image
INFO

78 EN

View image info

H

Select picture (P. 82)

AEL/AFL button

Protect picture (P. 81)



Delete picture (P. 82)

Q

View menus (in calendar playback, press this button to exit to singleframe playback)Index display/Calendar display• In single-frame playback, rotate the rear dial to G for index playback. Rotate further for
My Clips playback and further still for calendar playback.
• Turn the rear dial to U to return to single-frame playback.
100%

q

Wi-Fi

q

100%

100%

FHD

30p

FHD

30p

12:12 MOV

FHD

30p

q

Sun

Mon

2017.01.01 12:30:00

20

Single-frame
playbackp

2017.01.01 12:30:00

21

Index display

p

2017.01.01 12:30:00

My Clips playback*1

p

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

L N 100-0020

3

2017.1

100%

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

16

31

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Calendar display

Q

Playback

11:23 MOV

11:24 MOV

*1 If one or more My Clips have been created, it will be displayed here (P. 72).
• You can change the number of frames for index display. g [G Settings] (P. 128)

Viewing still images
Close-up playback
In single-frame playback, turn the rear dial to U to zoom in. Turn to G to return to singleframe playback.
100%

p

Wi-Fi

L N 100-0020
2017.01.01 12:30:00

Single-frame
playback

p

100%

14x

2x

20

q

100%

2× zoomq

14× zoom

Close-up playback

RotateChoose whether to rotate photographs.

1
2
3Play the photograph back and press the Q button.
Select [Rotate] and press the Q button.
Press F to rotate the image counterclockwise, G to rotate it clockwise; theimage rotates each time the button is pressed.
• Press the Q button to save settings and exit.
• The rotated image is saved in its current orientation.
• Movies and protected images cannot be rotated.

EN 79

Slideshow
This function displays images stored on the card one after another.

1

Press the Q button during playback and select
[m].

100%

JPEG
R
RotatePrint Order
Copy
Erase

Back

3

2

Set

Adjust settings.

Playback

Start

Start the slideshow. Images are displayed in order, starting with thecurrent picture.

BGM

Set [Party Time] or [Off].

Slide

Set the type of data to be played back.

Slide Interval

Choose the length of time each slide is displayed from 2 to 10 seconds.

Select [Full] to play back full length of each movie clip in the slideshow orMovie Interval [Short] to play back only the opening portion of each movie clip.

3

Select [Start] and press the Q button.
• The slideshow will start.
• Press the Q button to stop the slideshow.

VolumeVolume can be adjusted by pressing F or G during singleframe and movie playback.

100%

00:00:02/00:00:14

Slideshow volume
Press FG during the slideshow to adjust the overall volume of the camera speaker.
Press HI while the volume adjustment indicator is displayed to adjust the balance
between the sound recorded with the image or movie and background music.

80 EN

Watching movies
Select a movie and press the Q button to display the
playback menu. Select [Play Movie] and press the Q
button to begin playback. Fast-forward and rewind using
H/I. Press the Q button again to pause playback. While
playback is paused, use F to view the first frame and G
to view the last frame. Use HI or the front dial (r) toview previous or next frame. Press the MENU button to
end playback.

Movie

100%

Play Movie
Movie Edit
Share Order
0

Copy
Back

Set

3
Playback

For movies of 4 GB or larger
If the movie was automatically split into multiple files, pressing Q will display a menu
containing the following options:[Play from Beginning]: Plays back a split movie all the way through[Play Movie]:
Plays back files separately[Delete entire n]:
Deletes all parts of a split movie[Erase]:Deletes files separately• We recommend using the latest version of OLYMPUS Viewer 3 to play back movies on
a computer. Before launching the software for the first time, connect the camera to thecomputer.

Protecting images
Protect images from accidental deletion.
Display the image you want to protect and press the AEL/
AFL button to add 0 to the image (protection icon).
Press the AEL/AFL button again to cancel protection. You
can also protect multiple selected images. g “Selecting
images (0, Copy Select, Erase Selected, Share Order
Selected)” (P. 82)

0 (protect) icon
100%

Wi-Fi

4:3

2017.01.01 12:30:00

L N 100-0020
20• Formatting the card erases all data including protected images.

Copying an image (Copy)
When there are cards with available space in both slots 1 and 2, you can copy an
image to the other card. When playing back an image you want to copy, press the Q
button to display the playback menu. After selecting [Copy] and pressing the Q button,
select whether or not to specify a folder to save to. Select [Yes], then press the Q
button to copy the image to the other card.
• You can also copy all images on a card to the other card at a time. g “Copy All” (P. 108)

EN 81

Erasing an image
Display an image you want to delete and pressthe  button. Select [Yes] and press the Q
button.
You can erase images without the confirmation
step by changing the button settings.
g [Quick Erase] (P. 121)

3

100%

Erase

Yes
CancelBackSet button

Playback

Selecting images (0, Copy Select, Erase Selected, Share Order
Selected)
You can select multiple images for [0], [Copy Select],[Erase Selected] or [Share Order Selected].
Press the H button on the index display screen (P. 79) toselect an image; a v icon will appear on the image. Press
the H button again to cancel the selection.
Press the Q button to display the menu, and then selectfrom [0], [Copy Select], [Erase Selected] or [Share Order
Selected].

100%

2017.01.01 12:30:00

21

Setting a transfer order on images (Share Order)
You can select images you want to transfer to a smartphone in advance. You can alsobrowse the images included in the share order. When playing back images you want
to transfer, press the Q button to display the playback menu. After selecting [Share
Order] and pressing the Q button, press F or G to set a share order on an image
and display h. To cancel a share order, press F or G.
You can select images you want to transfer in advance and set a share order all
at once. g “Selecting images (0, Copy Select, Erase Selected, Share Order
Selected)” (P. 82), “Transferring images to a smartphone” (P. 136)
• You can set a share order on 200 frames.
• Share orders cannot include RAW images or Motion JPEG (H) movies.

82 EN

Audio recording
Audio can be added to still images (up to 30 sec. long).

1
2

Display the image to which you want to add audio and press the Q button.
• Audio recording is not available with protected images.
• Audio recording is also available in the playback menu.

100%

JPEG
JPEG Edit
Add to My Clips
Share Order

Select [R] and press the Q button.

0• To exit without adding audio, select [Cancel].

R
RotateBack

Select [R Start] and press the Q button to begin
recording.

4

Press the Q button to end recording.
• Images recorded with audio are indicated by a H icon.
• To delete recorded audio, select [Erase] in Step 3.

100%

CancelR Start
Erase
Back

3
Playback

3

Set
R

Set

Adding still pictures to My Clips (Add to My Clips)
You can also select still pictures and add them to My Clips.
Display the still picture you wish to add and press the Q button to display the menu.
Select [Add to My Clips] and press the Q button. Using FGHI, select My Clips
and the order in which you wish to add the pictures, then press the Q button.
• For RAW or High Res Shot images, coarse images used for display are added.

EN 83

Using the touch screen
You can use the touch screen to manipulate images.

Full-frame playback

3

100%

Displaying the previous or next image• Slide your finger to the left to view the next image, andright to view the previous image.

Playback

Magnify• Lightly tap the screen to display the slider and P.
• Slide the bar up or down to zoom in or out.
• Slide your finger to scroll the display when the picture iszoomed in.
• Tap P to display index playback.
Tap Q for calendar playback and My Clips playback.

Index/My Clips/Calendar playback
Displaying the previous or next page
• Slide your finger up to view the next page, and down toview the previous page.
• Tap Q or R to switch the number of images
displayed. g [G Settings] (P. 115)
• Tap R several times to return to single-frame
playback.

100%

100%

S

Viewing images• Tap an image to view it full frame.

Selecting and protecting images
In single-frame playback, lightly tap the screen to display the touch menu. You canthen perform the desired operation by tapping the icons in the touch menu.
H

Select an image. You can select multiple images and delete them collectively.

h

Images you want to share with a smartphone can be set. g “Setting atransfer order on images (Share Order)” (P. 82)

0Protects an image.

• Do not tap the display with your fingernails or other sharp objects.
• Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.

84 EN

4 Menu functions
Basic menu operations
The menus contain shooting and playback options that are not displayed by the LV
super control panel, etc., and let you customize the camera settings for easier use.
W

Preliminary and basic shooting options (P. 86)

X

Advanced shooting options (P. 86)nMovie mode settings (P. 100)q

Playback and retouch options (P. 105)G

Customizing camera settings (P. 111)d

Camera setup (e.g., date and language) (P. 109)

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Tab

Shooting Menu 1

1 Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
2
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converterj/Y /Operation guide
Back

Menu functions (Basic operations)

100%

4

LN
Off

Set

Press the MENU button to
go back one screen

Press the Q button toconfirm the setting• A guide is displayed in 2 seconds after you select an option.
• Press the INFO button to view or hide guides.

2

Use FG to select a tab and press the Q button.
• The menu group tab appears when the G Custom
Menu is selected. Use FG to select the menu groupand press the Q button.

AF/MF

100%

1 A1 K AF mode

AEL/AFL2
A3 AF Scanner
B1
C-AF Lock
B2
C1 AF LimiterC2 5 Settings
D1 AF Area Pointer
A2

Back

S-AF
S-AF
mode1
±0
Off
On2

Set

Menu group

EN 85

3

Select an item using FG and press the Q button to display options for theselected item.
Function

Shooting Menu 2

100%

1

2

4

The current
setting isdisplayed

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

4

Bracketing
HDR
2Multiple Exposure
Keystone Comp.
Anti-Shock/Silent
High Res Shot
# RC Mode

1

Q

Off

Back

Shooting Menu 2

100%

Off
Off
Off
Off

Bracketing
HDR
Multiple Exposure
Keystone Comp.
Anti-Shock/Silent
High Res Shot
# RC Mode
Set

Off
On

Back

Off
Off

Off
Set

Use FG to highlight an option and press the Q button to select.
• Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.

• For the default settings of each option, refer to “Menu directory” (P. 165).

Using Shooting Menu 1/Shooting Menu 2
Shooting Menu 1

100%

1 Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
2
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y /
Back

LN
Off

Set

Shooting Menu 1

Shooting Menu 2

W

X

Reset / Custom Modes (P. 86)
Picture Mode (P. 61, 88)
KK (P. 55, 88)
Image Aspect (P. 54)
Digital Tele-converter (P. 88)
j/Y/i (Sequential shooting/Self-timer/Time lapse shooting)(P. 46, 54, 89, 90)

Bracketing (P. 91)
HDR (P. 49, 95)
Multiple Exposure (P. 95)
Keystone Comp. (P. 97)
Anti-Shock z/Silent [♥] (P. 98)
High Res Shot (P. 99)# RC Mode (P. 99, 153)

Returning to default settings (Reset)
Camera settings can be easily restored to default settings.

1

Select [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press the Q
button.

2

Select [Reset] and press the Q button.

3• Highlight [Reset] and press I to choose the reset
type. To reset all settings except the time, date, anda few others, highlight [Full] and press the Q button.
g “Menu directory” (P. 165)

Reset / Custom Modes

100%

Reset
Basic
Assign to Custom Mode
Recall from Custom Mode

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
Back

86 EN

Set

Registering favorites settings (Assign to Custom Mode)
Editing custom settings
Current camera settings can be saved to three Custom Modes (C1 to C3). Saved settings
can be recalled by rotating the mode dial to C1, C2, or C3, or using [Recall from Custom
Mode].

1

Adjust settings in order to save.

2

Select [Reset/Custom Modes] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press the Q
button.

3
4

Select [Assign to Custom Mode] and press I.

5

Select [Set] and press the Q button.

• Set the mode dial to the positions other than iAUTO (A), ART, or movie (n)mode.

• Selecting [Set] saves current settings, overwriting the registered settings.
• To cancel the registration, select [Reset].

• Settings that can be saved to the Custom Modes g “Menu directory” (P. 165)
• Settings are preset in each Custom Mode. Selecting [Reset] > [Full] when resetting
camera settings restores the preset settings for each Custom Mode. See “Default Custom
Mode options” for default settings (P. 175).
Recalling custom settings
Settings saved to mode dial C1, C2 or C3 can be recalled.

1

Select [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press the Q
button.

2
3
4

Select [Recall from Custom Mode] and press I.

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

Select the desired destination ([Custom Mode C1]–[Custom Mode C3]) andpress the Q button.

4

Select [Custom Mode C1]–[Custom Mode C3] and press the Q button.
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

• The shooting mode will not be applied if the mode dial is set to P, A, S or M.

EN 87

Processing options (Picture Mode)
You can make individual adjustments to contrast, sharpness and other parameters in[Picture Mode] (P. 61) settings. Changes to parameters are stored for each picture mode
separately.

1

Select [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1 andpress the Q button.
• The camera will display the picture mode available in thecurrent shooting mode.

4

Shooting Menu 1

100%

1 Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
2
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y /
Back

2

LN
Off

Set

Select an option with FG and press the Q button.

Menu functions (Shooting menu)• Press I to set the detailed options for the selected picture mode. Detailed options are notavailable for some picture modes.
• Changes to contrast have no effect at settings other than [Normal].

% Tips• You can reduce the number of picture mode options displayed in the menu.
g [Picture Mode Settings] (P. 115)

Image quality (KK)g “Selecting image quality (KK)” (P. 55)• You can change the JPEG image size and compression ratio combination, and [X] and[W] pixel counts. [K Set], [Pixel Count] g “Combinations of JPEG image sizes andcompression rates” (P. 131)

Digital Zoom (Digital Tele-converter)
Digital Tele-converter is used to zoom in beyond the current zoom ratio. The camera
saves the center crop. The subject is nearly doubled in size.

1
2

Select [On] for [Digital Tele-converter] in W Shooting Menu 1.
The view in the monitor will be enlarged by a factor of two.
• The subject will be recorded as it appears in the monitor.

• This function cannot be used in multiple exposure shooting.
• This function is not available when the information of [Movie Effect] is displayed on thescreen in movie mode.
• This function is not available when [Movie 6] is assigned to a button with [n Button
Function].
• When a RAW image is displayed, the area visible in the monitor is indicated by a frame.
• AF target drops.
• H is displayed on the monitor.

88 EN

Setting the custom self-timer (j/Y)
You can customize the self-timer operation.

1

Select [j/Y/i] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press
the Q button.

100%

Shooting Menu 1

1 Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
2

LN

Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y /
Back

Set

Select [j/Y] and press I.
Select [YC] (custom) and press I.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

Number of Frames

Sets the number of frames to be shot.

Y Timer

Sets the time after the shutter button is pressed until the picture istaken.

Interval Length

Sets the shooting interval for the second and subsequent frames.

Every Frame AF

Sets whether or not to perform AF right before a picture is taken with
self-timer.

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)

2
3
4

Off

EN 89

Shooting automatically with a fixed interval (i time lapse
shooting)
You can set the camera to shoot automatically with a set time lapse. The shot frames
can also be recorded as into a single movie. This setting is only available in P/A/S/M
modes.

1

Select [j/Y/i] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press
the Q button.

Shooting Menu 1

100%

1 Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
2

LN

Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y/

4

Back

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

2
3
4

Off

Set

Select [Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse] and press I.
Select [On] and press the I.
Adjust the following settings and press the Q button.

Number of Frames

Sets the number of frames to be shot.

Start Waiting Time

Sets waiting time before starting to shoot.

Interval Length

Sets interval between shots after shooting starts.

Time Lapse Movie

Sets recording format of frame sequence.
[Off]: Records each frame as a still picture.
[On]: Records each frame as a still picture and generates a single
movie from the frame sequence.

Movie Settings[Movie Resolution]: Choose a size for time lapse movies.
[Frame Rate]: Choose a frame rate for time lapse movies.

5

Shoot.

• Frames are shot even if the image is not in focus after AF. If you wish to fix the focus
position, shoot in MF.
• [Rec View] (P. 109) operates for 0.5 seconds.
• If either of the time before shooting, or shooting interval is set to 1 minute 31 seconds
or longer, the monitor and camera power will turn off after 1 minute. 10 seconds before
shooting, the power will automatically turn on again. When the monitor is off, press the
shutter button to turn it on again.
• If the AF mode (P. 43, 51) is set to [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR], it is automatically changed to [S-AF].
• Touch operations are disabled during time lapse shooting.
• This function cannot be used with HDR photography.
• It is not possible to combine time lapse shooting with bracketing, multiple exposure, andbulb, time or composite photography.
• The flash will not work if the flash charging time is longer than the interval between shots.
• If the camera automatically turns off in interval between shots, it will turn on in time for the
next shot.
• If any of still pictures are not recorded correctly, the time lapse movie will not be
generated.
• If there is insufficient space on the card, the time lapse movie will not be recorded.
• Time lapse shooting will be canceled if any of the following is operated:
Mode dial, MENU button, q button, lens release button, or connecting the USB cable.
• If you turn off the camera, time lapse shooting will be canceled.

90 EN• If there is not enough charge left on the battery, the shooting may end partway through.
Make sure the battery is charged enough before shooting.
• Depending on your computer’s system environment, you may not be able to view [4K]
movies on your computer. More information is available on the OLYMPUS website.

Varying settings over a series of photographs (Bracketing)“Bracketing” refers to the act of varying settings automatically over a series of shotsor a series of images to “bracket” the current value. You can store bracket shooting
settings and turn bracket shooting off.

1

Select [Bracketing] in X Shooting Menu 2 andpress the Q button.

Shooting Menu 2

100%

After selecting [On], press I and select a bracket
shooting type.
• When you select bracket shooting, t appears on thescreen.

Bracketing

100%

AE BKTWB BKTFL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
Focus BKT
Back

3

Off
Set

3f 1.0EV
A-- G-----Set

Press I, select settings for parameters such as the number of shots, andthen press the Q button.
• Press the Q button repeatedly until the screen returns to the one in step 1.
• If you select [Off] in step 2, bracket shooting settings will be saved and you can shootnormally.

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)

Back

2

Off
Off
Off
Off

Bracketing
HDR
2Multiple Exposure
Keystone Comp.
Anti-Shock/Silent
High Res Shot
# RC Mode1• Bracketing can not be combined with HDR, interval-timer photography, digital shift,
multiple-exposure photography, or high res shots.
• Bracketing is not available if there is not enough space on the camera’s memory card forthe selected number of frames.

% Tips• If you turn the Custom Menu [Switch v Function] (P. 113) [On], bracketing settings areavailable with button operation. Set the Fn lever to position 2 and rotate the dial whilepressing the jYHDR button. You can select the bracket shooting type with the front
dial and the number of shots with the rear dial. After settings are complete, you can switch
between bracketing and normal shooting by pressing the jYHDR button.

EN 91

AE BKT (AE bracketing)
The camera varies the exposure of each shot. You can select the bracketing increment from
0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, and 1.0 EV. In single-frame shooting mode, one photograph is taken eachtime the shutter button is pressed all the way down, while in sequential shooting mode thecamera continues to take shots in the following order while the shutter button is pressed all
the way down: no modification, negative, positive. Number of shots: 2, 3, 5, or 7

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)• The t indicator turns green during bracketing.
• The camera modifies exposure by varying aperture andshutter speed ( P mode), shutter speed (A and M modes),or aperture (S mode). If [All] is selected for [ISO-Auto] (P. 117)
in M mode and [AUTO] is selected for [ISO] (P. 42, 51), thecamera modifies exposure by varying ISO sensitivity.
• The camera brackets the value currently selected for
exposure compensation.
• The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value
selected for [EV Step]. g [EV Step] (P. 117)

Bracketing

100%

Back

Set

WB BKT (WB bracketing)Three images with different white balances (adjusted in specified color directions) areautomatically created from one shot, starting with the value currently selected for whitebalance. WB bracketing is available in P, A, S and M modes.
• White balance can be varied by 2, 4, or 6 steps on each of
the A – B (Red– Blue) and G – M (Green – Magenta) axes.
• The camera brackets the value currently selected for whitebalance compensation.

WB BKT

100%

A-B

G-M

3f 4Step

3f 4Step

Back

Set

FL BKT (FL bracketing)
The camera varies flash level over three shots (no modification on the first shot, negative on
the second, and positive on the third). In single-frame shooting, one shot is taken each time
the shutter button is pressed; in sequential shooting, all shots are taken while the shutter
button is pressed.
• The t indicator turns green during bracketing.
• The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value
selected for [EV Step]. g [EV Step] (P. 117)

Bracketing

100%

AE BKTWB BKTFL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
Focus BKT
Back

92 EN

-Off
A-- G-2f 0.3EV
2f 0.7EV -2f 1.0EV -3f 0.3EV -3f 0.7EV -3f 1.0EV

AE BKTWB BKTFL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
Focus BKT

-A-- G--Off
3f 0.3EV -3f 0.7EV -3f 1.0EV -Set

ISO BKT (ISO bracketing)
The camera varies the sensitivity over three shots while keeping the shutter speed andaperture fixed. You can select the bracketing increment from 0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, and 1.0 EV.
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera shoots three frames with the set
sensitivity (or if auto sensitivity is selected, the optimal sensitivity setting) on the first shot,
negative modification on the second shot, and positive modification on the third shot.
• The size of the bracketing increment does not change withthe value selected for [ISO Step]. g [ISO Step] (P. 117)• Bracketing is performed regardless of the upper limit set with
[ISO-Auto Set]. g [ISO-Auto Set] (P. 117)

Bracketing

100%

AE BKTWB BKTFL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
Focus BKT

-A-- G---Off
3f 0.3EV -3f 0.7EV -3f 1.0EV

Back

100%

ART BKT
Pop ArtPop ArtSoft Focus
Pale&Light Color
Pale&Light Color
Light Tone
Grainy Film

Back

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)

ART BKT (ART bracketing)
Each time the shutter is released, the camera records multiple
images, each with a different art filter setting. You can turn art
filter bracketing on or off separately for each picture mode.
• Recording may take some time.
• ART BKT cannot be combined with WB BKT or ISO BKT.

Set

EN 93

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)

Focus BKT (Focus bracketing)Take a series of shots at different focus positions. Focus moves
successively farther from the initial focus position. Choose thenumber of shots using [Set number of shots] and the change
in focus distance using [Set focus differential]. Choose smaller
values for [Set focus differential] to narrow the change in focus
distance, larger values to widen it. If you are using a flash otherthan the dedicated flash unit, you can specify the time it takes tocharge using the [#Charge Time] option.
Press the shutter button all the way down and release it
immediately. Shooting will continue until the selected number ofshots is taken or until the shutter button is pressed all the way
down again.
• Focus bracketing is not available with lenses that havemounts conforming to the Four-Thirds standard.
• Focus bracketing ends if zoom or focus is adjusted during
shooting.
• Shooting ends when focus reaches infinity.
• Pictures taken using focus bracketing are shot in silent
mode.
• To use the flash, select [Allow] for [Silent [♥] Mode Settings]> [Flash Mode].
g [Silent [♥] Mode Settings] (P. 98)• Focus bracketing can not be combined with other forms ofbracketing.

Bracketing100%-A-- G---3f 0.7EV
-Off
On
--

AE BKTWB BKTFL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
Focus BKT
Back

Set
Set number of shots

100%

0 0 3

Back

Set
Focus BKT

100%

Focus Stacking
Set number of shots
Set focus differential#Charge Time

Wide

10

3
1

Narrow
Back

Set
Charge Time100%

30 secSelect time between shutter
release for flash recharge.
This setting is not necessary
when using an Olympus flash.
Back

Set

Focus BKT (Focus Stacking)
The focus position is automatically shifted to capture 8 shots which are then composited for asingle JPEG image that is in focus all the way from the foreground to background.
• The focus position is automatically shifted based on the
Focus BKT
center of the focal position and 8 frames are captured in a
Focus Stacking
On
Set number of shots
99
single shot.
Set focus differential
5#Charge Time• If compositing fails, the image will not be saved.
0 sec• Focus stacking ends if zoom or focus is adjusted during
shooting.
Back
Set• The angle of view for composited images is narrower thanthe original images.
• See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses that can be used with [Focus
Stacking].
• Focus stacking can not be combined with other forms of bracketing.
100%

94 EN

Taking HDR (High Dynamic Range) images
You can shoot HDR (High Dynamic Range) images.
g “Taking HDR (High Dynamic Range) images” (P. 49)

1

Select [HDR] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the
Q button.

Shooting Menu 2

100%

2

Back

Off
Set

4

Select a type of HDR photography and press the Q button.
Shoot.
• When you press the shutter button, the camera automatically shoots the set numberof images.

Recording multiple exposures in a single image (Multiple
Exposure)
Record multiple exposures in a single image, using the option currently selected forimage quality.

1 Select [Multiple Exposure] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q button.
Multiple Exposure
2 Use FG to select the item and press I.
Number of Frames
Off
100%

• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

Number of
FramesAuto Gain

Overlay

Off
Off

Select [2f].
When set to [On], the brightness of each frame
is set to 1/2 and the images are overlaid.
When set to [Off], the images are overlaid withthe original brightness of each frame.
When set to [On], a RAW image recorded on acard can be overlaid with multiple exposures.
The number of pictures taken is one. The
image is saved as a separate image.

• a is displayed on the monitor while multiple exposure
is in effect.

3

Auto Gain
Overlay

Back

Menu functions (Shooting menu)

2
3

Off
Off
Off
Off

Bracketing
HDR
Multiple Exposure
Keystone Comp.
Anti-Shock/Silent
High Res Shot
# RC Mode

1

Set

100%

ISO

400

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:0338

Shoot.
• a is displayed in green if shooting starts.
• Press  to delete the last shot.
• The previous shot is superimposed on the view as a guide to framing the next shot.

EN 95

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
96 EN• The camera will not go to sleep while multiple exposure is in effect.
• Photographs taken with other cameras cannot be included in a multiple exposure.
• When [Overlay] is set to [On], the images displayed when a RAW image is selected aredeveloped with the settings at the time of shooting.
• To set the shooting functions, cancel multiple exposure shooting first. Some functions
cannot be set.
• Performing any of the following operations after the first shot is taken ends multiple
exposure photography:
turning the camera off, pressing the q or MENU button, choosing a different shooting
mode, or connecting cables of any type. Multiple exposure is also canceled when thebattery is exhausted.
• When a RAW image is selected using [Overlay], the JPEG image for the image recordedin RAW+JPEG is displayed.
• Multiple exposure cannot be used with some shooting functions such as bracketing.

% Tips• To overlay 3 or more frames: Select RAW for [K] and use the [Overlay] option to makerepeated multiple exposures.
• For more information on overlaying RAW images: g “Image overlay” (P. 107)

Keystone correction and perspective control (Keystone Comp.)
Use keystone correction for shots taken from the bottom of a tall building, ordeliberately exaggerate the effects of perspective. This setting is only available in
P/A/S/M modes.

1

Select [On] for [Keystone Comp.] in X Shooting
Menu 2.

P

Adjust the effect in the display and frame the shot.

3

Shoot.

250 F5.6• Use the front dial and rear dial for keystone correction.
• Use FGHI to choose the area to be recorded. The area cannot be changed
depending on the amount of correction.
• Press and hold the Q button to cancel any changes.
• To adjust aperture, shutter speed, and other shooting options while keystonecompensation is in effect, press the INFO button to view a display other than
keystone compensation adjustment. To resume keystone compensation, press the
INFO button until keystone compensation adjustment is displayed.
• The following may occur as the correction amount increases.
- The image will be coarse.
- The magnification ratio for image cropping will be large.
- The crop position will not be able to move.
• To end keystone compensation, select [Off] for [Keystone Comp.] in X Shooting
Menu 2.

• When [D (Keystone Comp.)] (P. 68) is assigned to a button using Button Function, press
and hold the selected button to end keystone correction.
• Photos are recorded in RAW+JPEG format when [RAW] is selected for image quality.
• The desired results may not be obtained with converter lenses.
• Depending on the amount of correction, some AF targets may be outside the display area.
An icon (g, h, i or j) is displayed when the camera focuses on an AF target outside
the display area.
• The following is not available while keystone compensation is in effect.
Live bulb/live time/composite photography, sequential shooting, bracketing, HDR,
multiple exposure, digital tele-converter, movie, [C-AF] and [C-AF+TR] autofocus
modes, [e-Portrait] and ART picture modes, custom self-timer, High Res Shot
• If a focus distance is selected for [Image Stabilizer] or you are using a lens for which lensinfo has been provided, the correction will be adjusted accordingly. Except when using a
Micro Four Thirds or Four Thirds lens, choose a focal length using the [Image Stabilizer]
option (P. 53).

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)

2

18 mm

100%

EN 97

Setting anti-shock/silent shooting (Anti-Shock z/Silent [♥])
By setting anti-shock/silent shooting you can select anti-shock or silent shooting whenusing sequential shooting/self-timer (P. 46).

1

Select [Anti-Shock z/Silent [♥]] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q
button.

2

Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

Anti-Shock z

Sets the time period between the shutter button being pressed all
the way down and the shutter release when shooting in anti-shockmode. If the interval is set, the item marked with z is displayed as
an option for sequential shooting/self-timer mode. When not using
anti-shock shooting, set to [Off]. Use this mode to suppress small
vibrations caused by the operation of the shutter. Anti-shock mode isavailable in both sequential shooting and self-timer modes (P. 46).

Silent [♥]Sets the time period between the shutter button being pressed all
the way down and the shutter release when shooting in silent mode.
If the inteval is set, the item marked with ♥ is displayed as an option
for sequential shooting/self-timer mode. When not using silent
shooting, set to [Off].

Noise Reduction[♥]

Set to [Auto] to reduce noise in long exposure shots when using
silent shooting mode. During noise reduction processing, the soundof shutter operation can be heard.

Silent [♥] Mode
Settings

Choose [Allow] or [Not Allow] for each of [8], [AF Illuminator], and[Flash Mode].

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
98 EN

Setting high resolution shooting (High Res Shot)
By specifying the setting for [High Res Shot], high resolution shooting can be activatedby selecting h from options for sequential shooting/self-timer mode (P. 46).

1
2

Select [High Res Shot] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q button.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
Sets the time period between the shutter button being pressed
all the way down and the shutter release when shooting in hi-res
shot mode. If the inteval is set, h is displayed as an option forsequential shooting/self-timer mode. When not using high resolution
shooting, set to [Off].

#Charge Time

Sets the charging time for flashes other than the dedicated flash.

• Electronic shutter is used for high resolution shooting.
• g “Using a flash (Flash photography)” (P. 57)

Shooting with remote control wireless flash
Shooting with wireless flash is possible using the supplied flash unit with remote control
wireless flash units. g “Wireless remote control flash photography” (P. 153)

4
Menu functions (Shooting menu)High Res Shot

EN 99

Using the Video Menu
Movie recording functions are set in the Video Menu.

Video Menu

100%

1
2

n Moden Specification Settingsn AF/IS Settings
n Button/Dial/Levern Display Settings
Movie Rn HDMI Output

Back

Option4
Menu functions (Video menu)
100 EN

Description

P

Set

g

n ModeChoose a movie record mode.

102

n Specification
Settings

Sets the image quality for movie recording.
[nK]: Set a combination of image quality size and bit
rate.
[n Noise Filter]: Select a noise reduction level forrecording high-sensitivity movies.
[n Picture Mode]: Record in a picture mode suitable forediting when set to [On].

102n AF/IS Settings[n AF Mode]: Choose the AF mode for movie recording.
[n Image Stabilizer]: Sets image stabilization for movie
recording.

43, 51,53n Button/Dial/
Lever

Set the button, dial, and lever functions for movie mode.
[n Button Function]: Sets functions to buttons for movie
mode.
[n Dial Function]: Sets the functions of the rear dial andfront dial for movie mode. If [Exposure F] is assigned to
the front or rear dial, exposure compensation is possible up
to ±3 EV (steps of 1/2 and 1 EV are also supported).
[n Fn Lever Function]: Sets functions to be switched by
the Fn lever in movie mode.
The Fn lever switches to the function set with [n Dial
Function] when set to [mode1]. If selecting [mode2] andpressing I, functions to be switched by the Fn lever canbe selected from AF Mode, 5 (AF target setting),
and 6 (AF area). This setting has no effect when [mode3]
is selected for [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 113) or when
[Power 1] or [Power 2] is selected for [Fn Lever/Power
Lever] (P. 113).
[n Shutter Function]: Sets the shutter button function formovie mode.
When set to [w], pressing the shutter button initiates
autofocus. Still image photography is not available. Whenset to [R REC], movie recording can be started or stopped
by pressing the shutter button all the way down. The
R button cannot be used for starting or stopping movie
recording with this setting.
[n Elec. Zoom Speed]: Sets the zoom speed for the
power zoom lens operation by the zoom ring.

—OptionDescriptiong—Movie K

Audio will not be recorded in a movie when set to [Off].

103

n HDMI Output

Sets the output setting for recording movies with thiscamera connected with an external device via HDMI.
[Output Mode]: Sets the video output mode. When set to[Monitor Mode], image and camera information are output.
The camera information is not displayed on the camera
screen.
When set to [Record Mode], only image is output. The
camera information is displayed on the camera screen.
[REC Bit]: If set to [On], the REC trigger is sent from thecamera to the connected external device.
[Time Code]: If set to [On], the time code is sent from thecamera to the connected external device.
• The recording by the external device that uses the timecode as the REC trigger may be stopped in the following
cases.
- When recording an ART movie, etc., under heavy
processing load
- When switching the display between the monitor andviewfinder—

4
Menu functions (Video menu)n Display Settings [n Control Settings]: Sets whether to display Live Control(P. 126) and Live SCP (P. 50) in movie mode. For setting not todisplay, select the item and press the Q button to clear the
check mark.
[n Info Settings]: Sets the information to be displayedon the movie recording screen. For setting not to display,
select the item and press the Q button to clear the check
mark.
[Time Code Settings]: Set the time codes to record formovie mode.
Set [Time Code Mode] to [Drop Frame] to record timecodes corrected for errors with respect to recording time,
and to [Non-DF] (no drop frame) to record uncorrected timecodes.
Set [Count Up] to [Rec Run] to run time codes during
recording only, and to [Free Run] to run time codes evenwhile recording is stopped, including when the camera isturned off.
In [Starting Time], set a starting time for the time code. Set[Current Time] to set the time code for the current frame to
00. To set to 00:00:00:00, select [Reset]. You can also set
time codes using [Manual Input]. Time codes cannot berecorded in Motion JPEG (H).
[8 Display Pattern]: Sets the battery level display (“%” or“minutes”) in movie mode and during movie recording.

EN 101

Adding effects to a movie
You can create movies that take advantage of the effects available in still photography
mode.

1
2

Select [n Mode] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
Use FG to select an option and press the Q button.
P

Optimal aperture is set automatically according to the brightness of the subject.
Use the front dial (r) or rear dial (o) to adjust exposure compensation.

A

Depiction of background is changed by setting the aperture.
Use the front dial (r) to adjust exposure compensation and rear dial (o) to adjust
aperture.

S

Shutter speed affects how the subject appears. Use the front dial (r) to adjust
exposure compensation and rear dial (o) to adjust shutter speed.
Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/24 s and 1/8000 s.

M

Aperture and shutter speed can be manually set.
Use the front dial (r) to select aperture value and the rear dial (o) to selectshutter speed.
Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/3 s and 1/8000 s.
ISO sensitivity can only be set manually to values between 200 and 6400.

4
Menu functions (Video menu)• Blurred frames caused by such factors as the subject moving while the shutter is open
can be reduced by selecting the fastest available shutter speed.
• The low end of the shutter speed changes according to the frame rate of the movie recordmode.
• Excessive camera shake may not be compensated enough.
• When the inside of the camera becomes hot, shooting is automatically stopped to protect
the camera.
• With some art filters, [C-AF] function is limited.

Setting the record mode (nK)
You can set combinations of movie image size and bit rate. The settings can beselected from options of movie record mode (P. 56).

12
3

102 EN

Select [n Specification Settings] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
Select [nK] and press I.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

Image size

Sets the image size to [C4K] (Custom only), [4K], [FHD] (FullHD), or [HD].

Bit rate

Sets the bit rate to [A-I] (All-Intra), [SF] (Super Fine), [F] (Fine), or[N] (Normal).
• [A-I] (All-Intra) is not available for use with Clips.
• When [4K] or [C4K] is set for the image size, you cannot selectthe bit rate.

Sets the frame rate to [60p], [50p], [30p], [25p], or [24p].
• [60p] and [50p] are not available in the following situations.
- When [FHD] (Full HD) is set for the image size and [A-I] (AllIntra) is set for the bit rate.
- When [C4K] or [4K] is set for the image size.
• If the image size is set to [C4K], the frame rate is locked to 24p.

Shooting time

Sets the shooting time to [8 sec], [4 sec], [2 sec], [1 sec], or [Off](Custom only).
The shooting time can only be set for Clips and Custom settings.
• When [C4K] is set for the image size, the shooting time islocked to [Off].

Slow or Fast Motion

Sets slow or fast motion.
Available settings differ depending on the set frame rate.
• Slow and fast motions cannot be used in some image quality
modes.

Setting the sound recording for movie (Movie K)
Configure the sound recording settings for movie recording.

1
2
3

Select [Movie K] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
Select [On] and press I.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

Recording Volume

Adjust microphone sensitivity for the built-in microphone and for
optional external microphones.
Adjust the sensitivity using FG while checking the peak soundlevel picked up by the microphone over the previous few seconds.

K Volume Limiter

If set to [On], the volume is automatically regulated when thevolume picked up by the microphone is louder than normal.

Wind Noise
Reduction

Reduce wind noise during recording.

K Plug-in Power

Set to [On] for distributing power to the microphone, and [Off]for using a professional microphone, etc, which does not require
power distribution from the camera.

4
Menu functions (Video menu)

Frame rate

PCM Recorder K Link Set to [On] for using an IC recorder connected to the microphonejack as a microphone. g “Recording movie audio with an IC
recorder” (P. 104)
Headphone Volume

Set the volume for the connected headphone.

• Operation sounds of the lens and camera may be recorded in a movie. To prevent it fromrecording, reduce the operation sounds by setting [AF Mode] to [S-AF] or [MF], or byminimizing the button operations of the camera.
• Sound cannot be recorded in k (Diorama) mode.
• When [Movie K] is set to [Off], O is displayed.

EN 103

Recording movie audio with an IC recorder
You can use an IC recorder to record audio in a movie.
Connect an IC recorder to the microphone jack of the camera for recording sound. Usea non-resistant cable for the connection.

1
2
3
4

4

Select [Movie K] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
Select [On] and press I.
Use FG to select [PCM Recorder K Link] and press I.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

Menu functions (Video menu)

Camera Rec. Volume

If set to [Inoperative], the sound recording settings in the camera
are disabled and the settings in the IC recorder are applied.

Slate Tone

If set to [On], the slate tone is played.

Synchronized R Rec. If set to [On], the IC recorder automatically starts/ends soundrecording at the same time when the movie recording starts/ends
in the camera.

Recording movie audio with the Olympus LS-100 IC recorder
When using the Olympus LS-100 IC recorder to record sound in a movie, you can add
a slate tone, start and stop recording with camera controls.
In [Movie K] > [PCM Recorder K Link], set [Slate Tone] and [Synchronized R Rec.] to[On].
Make sure that the LS-100 firmware is the latest version before recording.

1

Connect the LS-100 to the USB connector and microphone.

2

Start recording a movie.

3

End movie recording.

• When the LS-100 is connected to the USB connector, a message will be displayed
prompting you to choose a connection type. Select [PCM Recorder]. If the message
does not appear, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 117) in the custom menus.
• Audio recording on the LS-100 starts simultaneously.
• If you press and hold the Q button, you can record a slate tone.
• Audio recording on the LS-100 ends simultaneously.

• Refer to the documentation provided with the LS-100 as well.

104 ENUsing the Playback Menu
Playback Menuy (P. 80)100%

R (P. 105)
Edit (P. 105)
Print Order (P. 144)
Reset Protect (P. 108)
Copy All (P. 108)
Connection to Smartphone (P. 135)

Playback Menu

1
2

On
Edit
Print Order
Reset Protect
Copy All
Connection to Smartphone

Back

Set

If set to [On], images in portrait orientation are automatically rotated to be displayed in
the correct orientation on the playback display.

Editing still images
Recorded images can be edited and saved as separate images.
• The images to be edited can be chosen from those on the card currently selected forplayback. g “Setting the card to record to” (P. 132)

1
2
3

Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.

4

Select [RAW Data Edit] or [JPEG Edit] and press the Q button.

Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
Use HI to select the image to be edited and press the Q button.
• [RAW Data Edit] is displayed if a RAW image is selected, and [JPEG Edit] if a JPEG
image is selected. For images recorded in RAW+JPEG format, both [RAW Data Edit]and [JPEG Edit] are displayed. Select the desired option from them.

4
Menu functions (Playback menu)

Displaying images rotated (R)Creates a JPEG copy of a RAW image according to the selected settings.
Current
RAW Data
Edit
Custom1
Custom2
ART BKTThe JPEG copy is processed using the current camera
settings. Adjust the camera settings before choosing thisoption. Some settings such as exposure compensation are
not applied.
Edit by changing the settings on the screen. The usedsettings can be saved.
The image is edited using settings for the selected art filter.

EN 105

Choose from the following options:[Shadow Adj]: Brightens a dark backlit subject.
[Redeye Fix]: Reduces the red-eye phenomenon due to flash shooting.
[P]: Trims an image. Use the front dial(r) or rear dial (o) to choose the size ofthe trimming and FGHI to specify thetrimming position.

100%

O

4
Menu functions (Playback menu)
106 ENJPEG Edit

Set[Aspect]: Changes the aspect ratio of images from 4:3 (standard) to [3:2],[16:9], [1:1], or [3:4]. After changing the aspect ratio, use FGHI tospecify the trimming position.
[Black & White]: Creates black and white images.
[Sepia]: Creates sepia-toned images.
[Saturation]: Increases the vividness of images. Adjust the color saturation
checking the image on the screen.
[Q]: Converts the image size to 1280 × 960, 640 × 480, or 320 × 240.
Images with an aspect ratio other than 4:3 (standard) are converted to theclosest image size.
[e-Portrait]: Compensates the skin look for smoothness.
Compensation cannot be applied in such a case that a face cannot be
detected.

5

When the settings are complete, press the Q button.

6

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

• The settings are applied to the image.
• The edited image is stored in the card.

• Red-eye correction may not work depending on the image.
• Editing of a JPEG image is not possible in the following cases:
When an image is processed on a PC, when there is not enough space in the card
memory, or when an image is recorded on another camera.
• The image cannot be resized (Q) to the larger size than the original size.
• [P] (trimming) and [Aspect] can only be used to edit images with an aspect ratio of 4:3(standard).
• When [ART] is selected for picture mode, [Color Space] (P. 65) will be locked at [sRGB].

Image overlay
Up to 3 frames of RAW images taken with the camera can be overlaid and saved as aseparate image.
The image is saved with the record mode set at the time the image is saved. (If [RAW] is
selected, the copy will be saved in [YN+RAW] format.)

1
2
3
4

Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
Use FG to select [Image Overlay] and press the Q button.
Select the number of images to be overlaid and press the Q button.
Use FGHI to select the RAW images to beoverlaid.

Image Overlay

100%

RAW

• The overlaid image will be displayed if images of thenumber specified in step 3 are selected.

6

RAW

4

RAW

RAW

RAW

Adjust the gain for each image to be overlaid.
• Use HI to select an image and FG to adjust gain.
• Gain can be adjusted in the range 0.1 – 2.0. Check theresults in the monitor.

Back
100%

Set
Image Overlay

Press the Q button to display the confirmation
dialog. Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
×0.3

×1.5

×0.5

Back

Set

% Tips• To overlay 4 or more frames, save the overlay image as a RAW file and use [Image
Overlay] repeatedly.
Audio recording
Audio can be added to still images (up to 30 sec. long).
This is the same function as [R] during playback (P. 83).

Menu functions (Playback menu)

5

RAW

RAW

Saving a still image from a movie (In-Movie Image Capture)
You can select a frame from a movie to save as a still image.

1
2
3
4
5
6

Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
Use HI to select a movie and press the Q button.
Select [Movie Edit] and press the Q button.
Use FG to select [In-Movie Image Capture] and press the Q button.
Use HI to select a frame to be saved as a still image and press the Q
button.

• Movies recorded by this camera with the aspect ratio set to [16:9] and image quality mode
set to 4K size in MOV can be edited.

EN 107

Trimming movies (Movie Trimming)

4
Menu functions (Playback menu)

1
2
3
4
5
6

Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.

7

Specify an area to trim.

8

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
Use HI to select a movie and press the Q button.
Select [Movie Edit] and press the Q button.
Use FG to select [Movie Trimming] and press the Q button.
Select [Overwrite] or [New File] and press the Q button.
• If the image is protected, you cannot select [Overwrite].
• The range between the first or last frame and the selected frame are deleted.

• Editing is available with movies recorded using this camera.

Canceling all protections
Protections of multiple images can be canceled at a time.

1
2

Select [Reset Protect] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• All the protections of images saved in the card being played back will be canceled.

Copy All
All images can be copied between the cards inserted in the camera (card slot 1 and 2).

1
2

Select [Copy All] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
Select an option and press the Q button.

7

All images are copied from the card in card slot 1 to the card in card slot 2.

8All images are copied from the card in card slot 2 to the card in card slot 1.

3

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

• Copying ends when the destination card is full.

108 ENUsing the setup menu
Use the d Setup Menu to set the basic camera functions.

Setup Menu

100%

1
2

Card Setup--.--.-- --:--:-English
j±0 k±00.5 secW
Rec View
Wi-Fi Settings
Firmware

Back

OptionSet

g

Description
Format the card and delete all images.

110

X (Date/time setting)Set the camera clock.

19

W (Changing thedisplay language)

You can change the language used for the on-screen
display and error messages.

—

You can adjust thes (Monitor
brightness adjustment) brightness and color
temperature of themonitor. Color temperatureadjustment is only
applied to the monitor
display during playback.
Use HI to highlight j(color temperature) or k
(brightness) and FG toadjust the value.

100%

j
-2

Vivid
Back

k
+1

NaturalSet—

Press the INFO button to switch the saturation of themonitor between [Natural] and [Vivid] settings.
Rec View

Wi-Fi Settings

FirmwareSets whether to display the captured image on themonitor after shooting, and the length of time for the
display. This is useful for a brief check of the picture you
have taken. You can shoot the next shot by pressing the
shutter button halfway even while the captured image isdisplayed on the monitor.
[0.3sec] – [20sec]: Sets the length of time (seconds) todisplay the captured image on the monitor.
[Off]: The captured image is not displayed on the monitor.
[AUTO q]: Displays the captured image, and thenswitches to playback mode. This is useful for erasing a
picture after checking it.

—

Sets the wireless connection method for the camera toconnect with smartphones that support wireless LAN
connections.

137

Displays the firmware versions of the camera andconnected accessories.
Check the versions when you inquire about the camera
or accessories or when you download the software.

—

4
Menu functions (Setup menu)

Card Setup

EN 109Formatting the card (Card Setup)
Cards must be formatted with this camera before first use or after being used withother cameras or computers.
All data stored on the card, including protected images, is erased when the card isformatted.
When formatting a used card, confirm there are no images that you still want to keepon the card. g “Usable cards” (P. 147)

1

• When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, card slot
selection appears. Select a card slot and press the Q
button.
• If there is data on the card, menu items appear. Select[Format] and press the Q button.

4
Menu functions (Setup menu)
110 EN

Select [Card Setup] in the d Setup Menu and press
the Q button.

2

100%

Card Setup

All Erase
FormatBack

Set

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• Formatting is performed.

Deleting all images (Card Setup)
All images on a card can be deleted at a time. Protected images are not deleted.

1

Select [Card Setup] in the d Setup Menu and press
the Q button.

100%• When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, card slot
selection appears. Select a card slot and press the Q
button.

2
3

Select [All Erase] and press the Q button.
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• All images are deleted.

Card Setup

All Erase
FormatBack

Set

Using the custom menus
Camera settings can be customized using the G Custom Menu.
Custom Menu
1 A1 K AF mode

AEL/AFL2
A3 AF Scanner
B1
C-AF Lock
B2
C1 AF LimiterC2 5 Settings
D1 AF Area Pointer
A2

Back

S-AF
S-AF
mode1
±0
Off
On2

Set

MENU

J AF/MF
Option

AF/MF

100%

G

Description

Jg

K AF Mode

Choose the AF mode for still image shooting.

43, 51

AEL/AFL

Customize AF and AE lock.

123

AF ScannerSets the AF scan function* for when the camera cannot
focus on the subject or the contrast is not clear.
* Scans whole range from minimum range to infinity forfocus point when the camera cannot focus on the subject
or the contrast is not clear.
[mode1]: AF Scanner is not activated.
[mode2]: AF Scanner is activated once only.
[mode3]: AF Scanner is activated.

—

C-AF Lock

Sets the tracking sensitivity for C-AF.

—

AF Limiter

Limits the AF area when turned [On].
[Distance settings]: You can register the AF Limiter area.
You can register up to 3 distance areas.
Numerical value and unit (m, ft) can be set. The distance isapproximate and not exact.
[Pri. Rls]: If [On] is selected, the shutter can be released
while AF Limiter is operating even when the camera is notin focus.
• AF Limiter is not available in the following cases.
- When the focus limiter is enabled on the lens.
- When using focus bracketing- While in the movie mode or recording a movie—

5
Settings

Sets functions that appear in AF Target settings. To hide anitem, select the item and press the Q button to clear the
check mark.

39

AF Area Pointer[On1]: Displays the AF target frame in green.
[On2]: Displays the AF target frame in green while the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
If you select [Off], the AF target frame will not be displayed
during confirmation.

—

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

AF/MF (P. 111)
J/K/L
Button/Dial/Lever (P. 113)
M
N/O
Release/j/Image Stabilizer (P. 114)
P/Q/R/S Disp/8/PC (P. 115)
T/U/V
Exp/ISO/BULB/p (P. 117)W
# Custom (P. 118)X
K/WB/Color (P. 119)Record/Erase (P. 120)
Y/Z
EVF (P. 121)ab/c
K Utility (P. 122)

EN 111

K AF/MF

G

K

Descriptiong

AF Targeting Pad

If [On] is selected, the AF target can be positioned bytapping the monitor during viewfinder photography. Tap themonitor and slide your finger to position the AF target.
• When set to [On], drag operation can be disabled or
enabled by double-tapping the monitor.
• [AF Targeting Pad] can also be used with zoom frame AF(P. 41).

—

Set the AF target mode, AF target position, and AF modethat are used as the home position. Press Q button to
select the desired options in the [N Set Home] display. p
appears in the AF target selection display while you choosea home position.

—

You can change the dial and FGHI button functions for
the AF Area screen.
• To use the settings stored in [Set 2], highlight [Set 2] in the[N Custom Settings] menu and press Q button.
• You can switch to [Set 2] by pressing the INFO button in
the AF-target selection display.

—

N Set Home

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
112 EN

MENU

OptionN CustomSettings

AF Illuminator

Select [Off] to disable the AF illuminator.

—

I Face Priority

You can select the face priority or eye priority AF mode.

40

AF Focus Adj.

Focal location adjustment for phase-difference AF can befine tuned within a range of ±20 steps.

—

MENU

L AF/MF

G

L

DescriptiongPreset MF
distance

Sets the Preset MF focus position. Numerical value andunit (m, ft) can be set. The distance is approximate and notexact.

—MF Assist

When set to [On], you can automatically switch to zoom or
peaking in manual focus mode by rotating the focus ring.

124

MF Clutch

Selecting [Inoperative] prevents the lens MF clutch andsnapshot focus being used for manual focus. To focus
manually, slide the focus ring forward.

—

Focus Ring

You can customize how the lens adjusts to the focal point byselecting the rotational direction of the focus ring.

—

Bulb/Time
Focusing

You can change the focus position during exposure by using
manual focus (MF). When set to [Off], rotation of the focus
ring is disabled.

—

Reset Lens

When set to [Off], the focus position of the lens is not reseteven when the power is turned off. When set to [On], thefocus of power zoom lenses is also reset.

—

OptionM Button/Dial/Lever
OptionMENU

GDescription

Mg

K ButtonFunction

Choose the function assigned to the selected button.

9 LockIf [On] is selected, FGHI and Q button operations for
PBH (Power Battery Holder) are disabled.

—

K Dial Function

You can change the function of the front dial and rear dial.

—

Dial Direction

Choose the direction in which the dial is rotated to adjust
shutter speed or aperture. Change the program shift
direction in which the dial is rotated.

—[K Fn Lever Function]: You can switch the dial and button
function depending on the position of the Fn lever.
[Switch v Function]: When turned [On], you can switch thev button function depending on the position of the Fn lever.
When [On] is selected and the Fn lever is set to position 2,
the AF m button activates the flash and the jYHDR
button switches the setting to bracketing setting.

124[Fn]: Follows settings for the Fn lever function.
[Power 1]: The power turns on when the Fn lever is in
position 1, and off when in position 2.
[Power 2]: The power turns on when the Fn lever is in
position 2, and off when in position 1.
When [Power 1] or [Power 2] is set, the ON/OFF lever(power lever), [K Fn Lever Settings] and [n Fn Lever
Function] are disabled.

—

You can change the zoom speed used when operating
the power zoom lens with the zoom ring during still image
shooting.

—

K Fn Lever
Settings

K Elec. Zoom
Speed

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Fn Lever/Power
Lever

66

EN 113

N Release/j/Image Stabilizer
Rls Priority S
Rls Priority C
jL Settings
jH Settings

MENU

G

N

Descriptiong

If [On] is selected, the shutter can be released even when
the camera is not in focus. This option can be set separately
for S-AF and C-AF modes (P. 43, 51).

—

You can select from [j], [♦j], [♥j], and [0] for thesequential shooting speed and shot limit. You can set the
pre-shutter frames for [0]. Figures for sequential shooting
speed are the approximate maximums.

48

OptionGOO Release/j/Image Stabilizer

Menu functions (Custom menus)

MENU

4

K Image
Stabilizer

Sets image stabilization for still image shooting.

j Image
Stabilization

Sets the priority function during sequential shooting.
[Fps Priority]: Shooting speed gets priority over image
stabilization. The sensor will not be reset to the center
during sequential shooting.
[IS Priority]: Image stabilization gets priority over shooting
speed. The sensor will be reset to the center per frame ofsequential shooting. The shooting speed will drop slightly.

—

Half Way Rls
With IS

When set to [Off], the IS (Image Stabilization) function while
the shutter button is pressed halfway will not be activated.

—

Lens I.S. Priority

If [On] is selected, priority is given to the lens function
operation when using a lens with an image stabilization
function.
• This option has no effect on lenses that are equipped with
an image stabilization switch.

—

Option114 EN

Description

g
53

P Disp/8/PC

MENU

OptionK Control
Settings

GPg

Description
Choose the controls displayed in each shooting mode.
Shooting mode
Controls

A

P/A/S/M

ART

Live Control (P. 126)







Live SCP (P. 50)







Live Guide (P. 31)



–

–

Art Menu (P. 33)

–

–



125

4

Press the INFO button to switch the screen contents.

127,
128

Picture Mode
Settings

Select a function to display in the picture mode typeselection screen (P. 61). To hide an item, select the item andpress the Q button to clear the check mark.

—j/Y Settings

Select a function to display in the sequential shooting/selftimer function selection screen (P. 46). To hide an item, selectthe item and press the Q button to clear the check mark.

—Multi Function
Settings

Select a multi function (P. 70) option. When not using thisoption, select the item and press the Q button to clear the
check mark.

—

MENU

Q Disp/8/PC
OptionLive View Boost

Art LV Mode

Frame RateG

Description

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Choose the information displayed when the INFO button
is pressed.
[q Info]: Choose the information displayed in full frame
playback.
[qU Info]: Choose the information displayed in magnified
playback.
[LV-Info]: Choose the information displayed when thecamera is in shooting mode.
[G Settings]: Choose the information displayed in index,“My Clips”, and calendar playback.

G/Info SettingsQgShoot while checking the subject even under low-light
conditions. In M mode, you can use this setting whenshooting with BULB/TIME shooting and live composite.
[On1]: Prioritize smoothness of display.
[On2]: Prioritize image visibility in dark conditions.

—[mode1]: The filter effect is always displayed.
[mode2]: Priority is given to smooth display while the shutter
button is pressed halfway. The quality of art filter effectpreviews may be affected.

—

If set to [High], a moving subject can be tracked moresmoothly. However, the number of frames to be shot will
decrease slightly.
This setting is automatically set to [Standard] if the camera
becomes hot.

—EN 115

Q Disp/8/PC
Option
LV Close Up
Settings

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)z Settings

Flicker reduction

GQg[LV Close Up Mode]: When set to [mode1], pressing the
button halfway in the magnified live view returns to themagnified frame display. When set to [mode2], pressing the
button halfway in the magnified live view switches to theZoom AF display.
[Live View Boost]: When set to [On], the magnified area isadjusted for proper exposure. This is useful to check the
focus when shooting in dark locations. When set to [Off], themagnified area is displayed with the brightness of live view
before magnification. This is useful to check the focus whenshooting in backlit locations.

—[z Lock]: Select [On] to maintain the aperture at the
selected value even when releasing the button.
[Live View Boost]: Select [On] to shoot while checking the
subject even under low-light conditions.

—

Reduce the effects of flicker under some kinds of lighting,including fluorescent lamps. When flicker is not reduced by
the [Auto] setting, set to [50Hz] or [60Hz] in accordance withthe commercial power frequency of the region where thecamera is used.

—

MENU

R Disp/8/PC

GR

Descriptiong

Sets the guide line display that appears when shooting.
[Display Color]: Sets the guide line color and opacity. Can
be set to [Preset 1] and [Preset 2].
[Displayed Grid]: Select [w], [x], [y], [X], [x] or [1] todisplay a grid on the monitor.
[Apply Settings to EVF]: If [On] is selected, the guides
shown in the monitor will also be displayed in the viewfinderwhen [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style]. The
setting selected in [EVF Grid Settings] will be invalid.

—

You can change the edge enhancement color and intensity.
The edge enhancement color (red, yellow, white, black) andintensity (Standard, Low, High), and the brightness of thepeaking background (On, Off) can be set.
• If [Image Brightness Adj.] is set to [On], the brightness oflive view is adjusted to enhance the enhancement color.

124

Histogram
Settings[Highlight]: Choose the lower bound for the highlight display.
[Shadow]: Choose the upper bound for the shadow display.

127

Mode Guide

Select [On] to display a help for the selected mode whenthe mode dial is rotated to a new setting.

24

Selfie Assist

Selecting [On] optimizes the display for self-portraits whenthe monitor is in the self-portrait position.

129

OptionGrid Settings

Peaking Settings

116 ENMENU
Description

S Disp/8/PC

MENU

G

S

OptionDescriptiong

8 (Beep sound)

When set to [Off], you can turn off the beep sound that isemitted when the focus locks by pressing the shutter button.

—

HDMI

[Output Size]: Selecting the digital video signal format forconnecting to a TV via an HDMI cable.
[HDMI Control]: Select [On] to allow the camera to be
operated using remotes for TVs that support HDMI control.
This option takes effect when pictures are displayed on aTV.
[Output Frame Rate]: Select the output frame rate from [50pPriority] or [60p Priority] for using the camera connected toa TV with an HDMI cable.

130

Choose a mode for connecting the camera to a computer or
printer. Choose [Auto] to display USB mode options every
time the camera is connected. When you select [0],you can use dedicated software to control the camera
from a computer and transfer images from the camera to acomputer. Access the following URL to download and installthe dedicated software. To use [0], you must first set
the mode dial to P, A, S, or M mode.
http://support.olympus-imaging.com/oc1download/index/

—

MENU

T Exp/ISO/BULB/p

GT

DescriptiongAdjust correct exposure separately for each metering mode.
• This reduces the number of exposure compensation
options available in the selected direction.
• The effects are not visible in the monitor. To makenormal adjustments to the exposure, perform exposurecompensation (P. 39).

—

Choose the size of the increments used when selecting
shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, and otherexposure parameters.

—

ISO Step

Select the increments available for choosing ISO sensitivity.

—

ISO-Auto Set[Upper Limit / Default]: Choose the upper limit and default
value used for ISO sensitivity when [Auto] is selected forISO. [High Limit]: Choose the upper limit for auto ISO
sensitivity selection. [Default]: Choose the default value forauto ISO sensitivity selection. The maximum is 6400.
[Lowest S/S Setting]: Automatically sets the shutter speed
when the ISO sensitivity is raised in P and A modes.
If set to [Auto], the camera automatically sets the shutter
speed.

—

Choose the shooting modes in which [Auto] ISO sensitivity
is available.
[P/A/S]: Auto ISO sensitivity selection is available in allmodes except M.
[All]: Auto ISO sensitivity selection is available in all modes.

—

OptionExposure ShiftEV Step

ISO-Auto

Menu functions (Custom menus)

USB Mode4

EN 117

T Exp/ISO/BULB/p
OptionMENUTg

K Noise Filter

Choose the amount of noise reduction performed at highISO sensitivities.

—

Noise Reduct.

This function reduces the noise that is generated during
long exposures.
[Auto]: Noise reduction is performed at slow shutter speeds,
or when the internal temperature of the camera has risen.
[On]: Noise reduction is performed with every shot.
[Off]: Noise reduction off.
• The time required for noise reduction is shown in thedisplay.
• [Off] is selected automatically during sequential shooting.
• This function may not work effectively with some shooting
conditions or subjects.

29

4Menu functions (Custom menus)

MENU

U Exp/ISO/BULB/p
OptionBulb/Time Timer

GUg

Description
Choose the maximum exposure for bulb and time
photography.

—

Bulb/Time Monitor Set the monitor brightness when [BULB], [TIME], or [LiveComposite] is used.

—

Live Bulb—

Live Time

Composite
Settings

Choose the display interval during shooting. The numberof update times is limited. The frequency drops at high ISO
sensitivities. Choose [Off] to disable the display. Tap themonitor or press the shutter button halfway to refresh thedisplay.
Set an exposure time to be the reference in composite
photography .
MENU

V Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Option

—

30

G

V
g

Description

Metering

Choose a metering mode according to the scene.

AEL Metering

Choose the metering method used for AE lock (P. 45).
[Auto]: Use the currently selected metering method.

—

N Spot Metering

Choose whether the [Spot], [Spot Hilight], and [SpotShadow] spot metering options meter the selected AF
target.

—W # Custom
Option118 ENG

Description

MENU
Description

45, 51GW
g# X-Sync.

Choose the shutter speed used when the flash fires.

131# Slow Limit

Choose the slowest shutter speed available when a flash
is used.

131

W # Custom

MENU

OptionG

w+F

When set to [On], the exposure compensation value isadded to the flash compensation value.

#+WB

Adjust white balance for use with a flash.

OptionMENU

Gg

Description

4

1

Y SF

X

2

3

4

F

W N

W SF

Pixel Count

F

Back

Image size

55,
88,
131

Set

Compression
rate

Choose the pixel count for [X]- and [W]-size images.
1) Select [Xiddle] or [Wmall]and press I.

Pixel Count

100%

Xiddle
Wmall

2560×1920
1280×960

2) Choose a pixel count andpress the Q button.
Back

55,
88,
131

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Set

100%

2) Press the Q button.

Shading Comp.

X

You can select the JPEG image quality mode fromcombinations of three image sizes and four compression
rates.
1) Use HI to select a
combination ([K1] –[K4]) and use FG tochange.

Pixel Count39, 60—

X K/WB/Color
K Set

W
g

Description

Set

Choose [On] to correct peripheral illumination according to
the type of lens.
• Compensation is not available for teleconverters or
extension tubes.
• Noise may be visible at the edges of photographs taken athigh ISO sensitivities.

—

WB

Set the white balance. You can also fine-tune the whitebalance for each mode.

42, 52All x[All Set]: Use the same white balance compensation in allmodes except [CWB].
[All Reset]: Set white balance compensation for all modes
except [CWB] to 0.

—

W Keep Warm
Color

Select [On] to preserve “warm” colors in pictures taken
under incandescent lighting.

—Color SpaceYou can select a format to ensure that colors are correctly
reproduced when shot images are regenerated on a monitor
or using a printer.

65

EN 119

Y Record/Erase
Option

MENU

G

Y
g

Description

Card Slot Settings

Sets the card for recording still images or movies.

132

File Name[Auto]: Even when a new card is inserted, the file numbers
are retained from the previous card. File numberingcontinues from the last number used or from the highest
number available on the card.
[Reset]: When you insert a new card, the folder numbers
starts at 100 and the file name starts at 0001. If a card
containing images is inserted, the file numbers start at
the number following the highest file number on the card.
When recording data to two cards at the same time, files
are numbered under the same rule as for the single card
according to the file number and folder number of bothcards.

—

Choose how image files are named by editing the portion of
the filename highlighted below in gray.
sRGB: Pmdd0000.jpg
Pmdd
Adobe RGB: _mdd0000.jpg
mdd—

dpi Settings

Choose the print resolution.

—

Copyright
Settings*

Add the names of the photographer and copyright holder to
new photographs. Names can be up to 63 characters long.
[Copyright Info.]: Select [On] to include the names of thephotographer and copyright holder in the Exif data for new
photographs.
[Artist Name]: Enter the name of the photographer.
[Copyright Name]: Enter the name of the copyright holder.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

Edit Filename

1) Select characters from 1 and press the Q button.
The selected characters appear in 2.
2) Repeat Step 1 to complete the name, then highlight[END] and press the Q button.
• To delete a character, press the INFO button toplace the cursor in the name area 2, highlightthe character, and press .
Copyright Name

100%

2
1

—

05/63

ABCDE
! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . /0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ ] _a b c d e f g h i j k l m n END
o p q r s t u v w x y z { }CancelDeleteSet* OLYMPUS does not accept liability for damages arisingfrom disputes involving the use of [Copyright Settings].
Use at your own risk.
Lens Info Settings

120 EN

Save lens info for up to 10 lenses that do not automaticallysupply info to the camera.

132

Z Record/Erase
Option

MENU

G

Z
g

Description

Quick Erase

If [On] is selected, pressing the  button in the playback
display will immediately delete the current image.

—

RAW+JPEG Erase

Choose the action performed when a photograph recorded
at a setting of RAW+JPEG is erased in single-frame
playback .
[JPEG]: Only the JPEG copy is erased.
[RAW]: Only the RAW copy is erased.
[RAW+JPEG]: Both copies are erased.
• Both the RAW and JPEG copies are deleted whenselected images are deleted or when [All Erase] (P. 110) is
selected.

55,
82,
88

Choose the default selection ([Yes] or [No]) for confirmation
dialogs.

—

MENU

a EVF

G

a

OptionDescriptiong

EVF Auto Switch

If [Off] is selected, the viewfinder will not turn on when you
put your eye to the viewfinder. Use the u button to choose
the display.

—

Adjust viewfinder brightness and hue.
Brightness is automatically adjusted when [EVF Auto
Luminance] is set to [On]. The contrast of the information
display is also adjusted automatically.

—

EVF Style

Choose the viewfinder display style.

133

V Info Settings

Like the monitor, the viewfinder can be used to display
histograms, highlights and shadows, and level gauge. The
level gauge is available when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is set in[EVF Style].

—

Choose the type and color of framing grid displayed in the
viewfinder when [Off] is selected for [Apply Settings to EVF]
and [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style]. Choose
the framing grid from [w], [x], [y], [X], [x] or [1].

—V Half Way Level

If set to [Off], the level gauge will not be displayed when the
shutter button is pressed halfway down. The level gauge isavailable when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is set in [EVF Style].

—

S-OVF

Select [On] for a viewfinder display similar to an optical
viewfinder. Selecting [S-OVF] makes the details in shadowseasier to see.
is displayed in the viewfinder when [S-OVF] starts.
•• The display is not adjusted for settings such as whitebalance, exposure compensation, and picture mode.

—

EVF Adjust

EVF Grid Settings

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Priority Set

4

EN 121

b K Utilityb

The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to checkand adjust the image pickup device and image processing
functions.

159

Press-and-holdTime

Set the press-and-hold time until the function assigned tothe button operates, from [0.5 sec] to [3.0 sec].

—

Level Adjust

You can calibrate the angle of the level gauge.
[Reset]: Resets adjusted values to the default settings.
[Adjust]: Sets the current camera orientation as the 0
position.

—

Touchscreen
Settings

Activate the touch screen. Choose [Off] to disable the touch
screen.

—Menu Recall

Set [Recall] to display the cursor at the last position ofoperation when you display a menu. The cursor position will
be retained even when you turn off the camera.

—

Menu functions (Custom menus)c K Utility

MENU

G

c

OptionDescriptiongBattery Settings[Battery Priority]: Sets the preferred battery to use. When
[Body Battery] is selected, the battery in the body takes
priority. When [PBH Battery] is selected, the battery in the
PBH (Power Battery Holder) takes priority.
[Battery Status]: Displays the status of the equipped battery.

—

If no operations are performed for the selected period, thebacklight will dim to save battery power. The backlight will
not dim if [Hold] is selected.

—

The camera will enter sleep (energy saving) mode if nooperations are performed for the selected period. The
camera can be reactivated by pressing the shutter button
halfway.

—

When in sleep mode, the camera will automatically turn off
after the set time has elapsed.

—

Quick Sleep Mode When set to [On], the camera will go into energy-saving
mode during shooting without using live view, allowing
the camera to take pictures while using less power. The
backlight time and sleep time can be set.
Press the shutter button to return from energy-saving mode.
The camera will not go into energy-saving mode while thelive view is displayed or the viewfinder is in use.
The ECO icon is displayed on the super control panel when
set to [On].

—Backlit LCD

Sleep

Auto Power Off

122 ENGg

Pixel Mapping

4

MENU
Description

OptionEye-Fi*

Enable or disable upload when using an Eye-Fi card. The
setting can be changed when an Eye-Fi card is inserted.

—

Certification

Display certification icons.

—

* Use the Eye-Fi card in compliance with the laws and regulations of the country where thecamera is used. Onboard airplanes and in other locations in which the use of wirelessdevices is prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera, or select [Off] for [Eye-Fi].
The camera does not support the “endless” Eye-Fi mode.

AEL/AFLMENUG[AEL/AFL]J

S-AF AEL/AFL

100%

Autofocus and metering can be performed by pressing the
button to which AEL/AFL has been assigned. Choose amode for each focus mode.

mode1
Half Way
Fully
AEL
AFL

Assignments of AEL/AFL function

C-AF

MF

Half-press

When holding down
AEL/AFL

Full press

mode1

Focus
S-AF

Exposure
Locked

mode2

S-AF

mode3

–

mode1

C-AF start

Lockedmode2

C-AF start

mode3

–

mode4

–

mode1

–

mode2

–

mode3

–

Set

AEL/AFL Button
function

Focus–

Exposure
–

Focus
–

Exposure
Locked––Locked–Locked–Locked–S-AF–

Locked––Locked–LockedLocked–LockedLockedLocked–C-AF start––

LockedLockedC-AF start–

Locked–––Locked––Locked–LockedLocked

–

–

S-AF

–

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)

S-AF

AEL

Back

Shutter button function
Mode

AEL/S-AF
Exposure

EN 123

MF Assist
MENU

G

L

[MF Assist]

This is a focus assist function for MF. When the focus ring is rotated, the edge of thesubject is enhanced or a portion of the screen display is magnified. When you stop
operating the focus ring, the screen returns to the original display.

4
Menu functions (Custom menus)
124 EN

Magnify

Magnifies a portion of the screen. The portion to be magnified can be
set in advance using AF target. g “Setting the AF target” (P. 40)

Peaking

Displays clearly defined outlines with edge enhancement. You canselect the enhancement color and intensity. g [Peaking Settings](P. 116)• [Peaking] can be displayed using button operations. The display is switched every time
the button is pressed. Assign the switching function to one of the buttons in advance using
Button Function (P. 66).
• Press the INFO button to change the color and intensity when Peaking is displayed.
• When Peaking is in use, the edges of small subjects tend to be enhanced more strongly.
This is no guarantee of accurate focusing.

K Fn Lever Function
MENU

G

M

[K Fn Lever Settings][K Fn Lever Function]

You can switch the dial and button function depending on the position of the Fn lever.
Fn lever position and dial/button function list
Mode
Off

Fn lever position 1

Fn lever position 2

The Fn lever function is turned off.

mode1

The dial function operates according to settings in [K Dial Function] (P. 113).

mode2

Sets functions to be switched by the Fn lever from AF Mode, 5(AF target setting), and 6 (AF area).

mode3

Sets the shooting mode selectedby the mode dial.

Switches to the movie mode.

Choosing the control panel displays (KControl Settings)
MENU

G[KControl Settings]

P

Sets whether or not to display control panels for option selection in each shootingmode.
In each shooting mode, press the Q button to insert a check in the control panel you
want to display.
How to display control panels• Press the Q button while the control panel is displayed, then press the INFO button toswitch the display.
• Only control panels selected in the [KControl Settings] menu will be displayed.
100%

INFO

Change Color Saturation

100%

S-IS AUTO

INFO

WB
WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

NaturalS +1+1Normal+0.8

WB Auto100%

M-IS 1

Live Control(P. 126)

INFO

ISO
Auto

1023

Live SCP (P. 50)

INFO

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal+0.8
S-IS Auto
M-IS Auto

LN

P

1:02:03

0.0

WB

4:3

WB Auto

FullHD

100%

WB
WB
AUTO
AUTO

P/A/S/MN
F

250 F5.6

AUTO
AUTO

Live Guide (P. 31)

sRGB

S-IS Auto
M-IS Auto

4:3

LN
FHD F
60p

FHD F
60p

AUTO
AUTO

sRGB
N
F

250 F5.6

Live Control(P. 126)

FullHD
1:02:03

0.0

1023

Live SCP (P. 50)

INFO
INFO

100%

100%

S-IS AUTO
WB
WB
AUTO
AUTO

ART

100%

WB
ISO
Auto

WB
Auto

A+1
G+ 1
S-AF

Natural+1

S +1

Normal

+0.8

ART
1

4:3

LN
WB AutoPop Art
AUTO
AUTO

Art Menu (P. 33)

INFO

Menu functions (Custom menus)

ISO
Auto

WB
WB
AUTO
AUTO

A

4

100%

Live Control(P. 126)

FHD F
60p

S-IS Auto
M-IS Auto

sRGB
N
F

250 F5.6

FullHD
1:02:03

0.0

1023

Live SCP (P. 50)

INFO• For movie mode, set with [n Control Settings] of [n Display Settings] (P. 101).

EN 125

Live control
100%

M-IS 1P
WB
AUTO

Settings
S-AF

P

Program Auto
n

4

P

P

A

S

FHD F
60p

M

Functions

Available settings

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Image stabilizer* ...................................P. 53
Picture mode* .................................P. 61, 88
White balance* ...............................P. 42, 52
Sequential shooting/Self-timer........P. 46, 54
Aspect ratio...........................................P. 54
KK (image quality)*.............P. 55, 56, 88
n mode*............................................P. 102
Flash mode ...........................................P. 57

Flash intensity control ...........................P. 60
Metering mode................................P. 45, 51
AF mode*........................................P. 43, 51
ISO sensitivity* ...............................P. 42, 51
Face priority* ........................................P. 40
Movie sound record*...........................P. 103* Available in movie mode
• Some functions cannot be used depending on the shooting mode.
• When the controls in [KControl Settings] is set to [Live Control], you can use live control
even in A, P, A, S, M, ART modes (P. 115).

1

Press the Q button to display the live control.

2

Use FG to move the cursor to the desired function, then use HI to selectit and press the Q button.

• Press the Q button again to hide live control.

• The setting is confirmed if you leave the camera as-is for 8 seconds.

126 EN

Adding information displays
MENU

G

P

[G /Info Settings]

q Info (Playback information displays)
Use [q Info] to add the following playback information displays. The added displays are
displayed by repeatedly pressing the INFO button during playback. You can also choose to
not show displays that appear at the default setting.
100%

×10

100%

15

Histogram display

Shadow Highlight

100%

15

4

16

15

Highlight & Shadow display

Light box display

Light box display
Compare two images side-by-side. Press the Q button to select the image on the opposite
side of the display.
• The base image is displayed on the right. Use the front dial to select an image and press
the Q to move the image to the left. The image to be compared to the image on the left
can be selected on the right. To choose a different base image, highlight the right frameand press the Q.
• To change the zoom ratio, turn the rear dial. Press the Fn1 button and then FGHI toscroll the zoomed-in area, and rotate the front dial to select between images.
100%

Fn1

2x

100%

Fn1

100%

2x

2x

Fn1

53

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Highlight & Shadow display
Areas above the upper limit of brightness for the image are shown in red, those below thelower limit in blue. g [Histogram Settings] (P. 116)

54

qU Info (Magnified playback information display)
The magnified playback information displays can be set with [qU Info]. If [U] (Magnify) is
assigned to a button with Button Function (P. 66) in advance, the set displays can be switchedby repeatedly pressing the U button during playback. You can also choose to not show
displays that appear at the default setting.
100%

U

L N 100-0020
2017.01.01 12:30:00

20

100%

2x

U

20

100%

U

2x

EN 127

LV-Info (Shooting information displays)
You can add the Highlight&Shadow display screen to [LV-Info]. The added displays are
displayed by repeatedly pressing the INFO button during shooting. You can also choose to notshow displays that appear at the default setting.
G Settings (Index/calendar display)
You can change the number of frames to be displayed on the index display and set to notdisplay the screens that are set to be displayed by default with [G Settings]. Screens with acheck can be selected on the playback screen using the rear dial.
100%

q

Wi-Fi

q

100%

100
0%

100%

4

2017.01.01 12:30:00

Menu functions (Custom menus)
128 EN20

L N 100-0020
2017.01.01 12:30:00

20

2017.01.01 12:30:00

pSingle-frame
playback

20

4 framesp

2017.01.01 12:30:00

20

9, 25, or 100
framesIndex display

Sun

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Q

q

2017.1

100%

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

1

2

3

4

5

16

6

7

8

9

10

11

Calendar display

p

100%

11:23 MOV

FHD

30p

11:24 MOV

FHD

30p

12:12 MOV

FHD

30p

2017.01.01 12:30:00

qp

My Clips playback** If one or more My Clips have been created, it will be displayed here (P. 72).

Shooting self-portraits using the selfie assist menu
MENU

G

R

[Selfie Assist]

When the monitor is in the selfie position, you can display a convenient touch menu.

1
2

Select [On] for [Selfie Assist] in Custom Menu R.
Turn the monitor towards you.
100%

4:3

LN
FullHDF

4

1:02:0338• The self portrait menu is displayed in the monitor.
A

One touche-Portrait

Turning this on makes skin look smooth and translucent.
Valid only during iAUTO mode (A).

C

Touch shutter

When the icon is tapped, the shutter is released about
1 second later.

D

One touch custom
self-timer

Shoot 3 frames using the self-timer. You can set the numberof times the shutter is released and the interval between
each release using [Custom Self-timer] (P. 46, 54).

3

Frame the shot.

4

Tap C and shoot.

• Be careful that your fingers or thecamera strap do not obstruct the lens.

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Self portrait menu

• The shot image will be displayed on the monitor.
• You can also shoot by tapping the subject displayed in the monitor, or by pressing the
shutter button.

EN 129Viewing camera images on TV
MENU

G

S

[HDMI]

Use the separately sold cable with the camera to playback recorded images on yourTV. This function is available during shooting. Connect the camera to an HD TV using
an HDMI cable to view high-quality images on a TV screen.
HDMI connector (type D)

4

HDMI cable(Connect to the HDMI connector on
the TV.)

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Type A

Connect the TV and camera and switch the input source of the TV.
• When an HDMI cable is connected, images are displayed on both the television and thecamera monitor. Information is displayed on the television screen only.
• For details on changing the input source of the TV, refer to the TV’s instruction manual.
• Depending on the TV’s settings, the displayed images and information may become
cropped.
• If the camera is connected via an HDMI cable, you will be able to choose the digital video
signal type. Choose a format that matches the input format selected with the TV.
C4K

C4K via HDMI output.

4K

Priority is given to 4K HDMI output.

1080p

Priority is given to 1080p HDMI output.

720p

Priority is given to 720p HDMI output.

480p/576p

480p/576p HDMI output.

• Do not connect the camera to other HDMI output devices. Doing so may damage thecamera.
• HDMI output is not performed while connected via USB to a computer or printer.
• When [Output Mode] is set to [Record Mode] (P. 101), movies are output in the record modeset for movie. The images cannot be displayed on the connected TV if the TV does notsupport the record mode.
• 1080p output will be used in place of [4K] or [C4K] while the camera is being used to takephotographs.

Using the TV remote control
The camera can be operated by a TV remote control when connected to a TV that
supports HDMI control. g [HDMI] (P. 117)
The camera monitor turns off.
• You can operate the camera by following the operation guide displayed on the TV.
• During single-frame playback, you can display or hide the information display bypressing the “Red” button, and display or hide the index display by pressing the“Green” button.
• Some televisions may not support all features.

130 ENShutter speeds when the flash fires
MENU

G[# X-Sync.]/[# Slow Limit]

W

You can set shutter speed conditions for when the flash fires.
Shooting
mode
PFlash firing shutter speed
The camera automatically sets the
shutter speed.

A
S

The set shutter speed

M

Upper limit[# X-Sync.]
setting

Lower limit[# Slow Limit]
setting*
No lower limit

4* Extends up to 60 seconds when slow synchronization is set.

MENU

G

X

[K Set]You can set the JPEG image quality by combining image size and compression rate.
Image size

Compression rate

Name

Pixel CountSF(Super Fine)

F(Fine)N(Normal)B(Basic)Y(Large)5184×3888*

YSF

YF*

YN*

YB

XSF

XF

XN*

XB

WSF

WF

WN*

WB

3200×2400*

X(Middle)

2560×1920
1920×1440

Application

Select for the
print size

1600×1200

W(Small)

1280×960*
1024×768

For smallprints and use
on a website

Menu functions (Custom menus)

Combinations of JPEG image sizes and compression rates* Default

EN 131

Setting the card to record to
MENU

G

Y

[Card Slot Settings]

When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, you can select which card to record still
images and movies to.

1
2

4

Select [Card Slot Settings] in Custom Menu Y and press the Q button.
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.

Menu functions (Custom menus)

K Save Settings

Sets the recording method for still images. g “Setting the saving
method for shooting data (K Save Settings)” (P. 54)

K Save Slot

Sets the card for recording still images. This is operative when [KSave Settings] is set to [Standard] or [Auto Switch].

n Save Slot

Sets the destination for recording movies.

q SlotSelects the card for still image playback when [K Save Settings]
is set to [Dual Independent 1], [Dual Independent 3], [DualSame 1], or [Dual Same 3].

Assign Save Folder

Sets the card save destination folder.

Assign Save Folder

12
3

Select [Assign Save Folder] and press I.
Select [Assign] and press I.
Select a folder and press the Q button.
• If you select [New Folder], specify the 3-digit folder number and press the Q button.
• If you select [Existing Folder], use FG to select theexisting folder and press the Q button.
The first 2 frames and the last frame in the selected
folder are displayed.

100%

100OLYMP
101OLYMP
200OLYMP
202OLYMP
305OLYMP
420OLYMP
500OLYMP
Back

Existing Folder
5671
30
49
125
3250
108
427
Set

Saving lens info
MENU

G

Y

[Lens Info Settings]

Store lens info for up to 10 lenses that do not supply info automatically to the camera.

1
2

Select [Create Lens Information] for [Lens Info Settings] in Custom Menu Y.

3
4
5

Use FGHI to choose the [Focal Length].

Select [Lens Name] and enter a lens name. After entering a name, highlight[END] and press the Q button.
Use FGHI to choose the [Aperture Value].
Select [Set] and press the Q button.

• The lens will be added to the lens info menu.
• When a lens that does not supply info automatically is attached, the info used is indicatedby . Highlight a lens with a  icon and press the Q button.

132 EN

Selecting the display style of the viewfinder
MENU

G[EVF Style]a

Style 1/2: Displays only main items such as shutter speed and aperture value
Style 3: Displays same as the monitor
100%

S-IS AUTO

ISO

400

LN
FHD F

60P

100%

C1
AEL

250 F5.6 +2.0

Hi +7 WB ISO-A
Mid+2 AUTO
200
Sh-3

M

1:02:031023

1:02:03

250 F5.6

38

4

Style 3

Style 1/ Style 2

1 23 4

100%

C1
AEL

ih g

100%

C1
AEL

250 F5.6 +2.0

Hi +7 WB ISO-A
Mid+2 AUTO
200
Sh-3

1:02:03

1023

100%

56

f e

C1
AEL

Hi +7 WB ISO-A
Mid+2 AUTO
200
-3
Sh
Sh-3

250 F5.6 +2.0

d

c

b

1023

a 0 9 8 7
Hi +7 WB ISO-A
Mid+2 AUTO
200
Sh-3

250 F5.6 +2.0

1:02:03

1:02:031023

j

1 Battery check
j: Ready for use.
k: Low battery
l: Battery is running low.
m: Charging required.
2 z ....................................................P. 67
3 Shooting mode.........................P. 24 – 37
4 Assign to Custom Mode............P. 35, 87
5 n Save Slot .................................P. 132
6 Available recording time ...............P. 148
7 Number of storable still pictures ...P. 148
8 K Save Settings ...........................P. 54
9 ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 42, 51
0 White balance ...........................P. 42, 52

Menu functions (Custom menus)
Viewfinder display when shooting using the viewfinder (Style 1/Style2)

a Highlight&Shadow Control ..............P. 66
b Top: Flash intensity control .............P. 60
Bottom: Exposure compensation
indicator ..........................................P. 39
c Exposure compensation value........P. 39
d Aperture value ........................ P. 26 – 29
e Shutter speed ..........................P. 26 – 29
f AE Lock u ...........................P. 45, 123
g AF confirmation mark......................P. 25
h Flash (blinks: charging in progress)........................................................P. 57
i PBH (displayed when using the power
battery holder power) ....................P. 150
j Level gauge (displayed by pressing the
shutter button down halfway)

You can change the viewfinder display style. g [EVF Style] (P. 121)

EN 133

5Connecting the camera to asmartphone

By connecting to a smartphone through this camera’s wireless LAN function and using
the specified app, you can enjoy even more features during and after shooting.
Things you can do with the specified app, OLYMPUS Image Share (OI.Share)5• Camera image transfer to a smartphone
You can load images in the camera to a smartphone.
• Remote shooting from a smartphone
You can remotely operate the camera and shoot using a smartphone.
• Beautiful image processing
You can apply art filters and add stamps on images loaded to a smartphone.
• Addition of GPS tags to camera images
You can add GPS tags to images simply by transferring the GPS log saved on thesmartphone to the camera.

Connecting the camera to a smartphone

For details, visit the address below:
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oishare/• Before using the wireless LAN function, read “Using the wireless LAN function” (P. 183).
• If using the wireless LAN function in a country outside the region where the camera waspurchased, there is a risk that the camera will not conform to the wireless communication
regulations of that country. Olympus will not be held responsible for any failure to meetsuch regulations.
• As with any wireless communication, there is always a risk of interception by a third party.
• The wireless LAN function on the camera cannot be used to connect to a home or publicaccess point.
• The transmitting antenna is located inside the grip. Keep the antenna away from metal
objects whenever possible.
• During wireless LAN connection, the battery will run down faster. If the battery is runninglow, the connection may be lost during a transfer.
• Connection may be difficult or slow in proximity to devices that generate magnetic fields,
static electricity or radio waves, such as near microwaves, cordless telephone.
• While connected to a smartphone running OI.Share, the camera will function as if[Standard] is selected for [Card Slot Settings] > [K Save Slot] (P. 132), and OI.Share will
have access only to the card in the slot currently selected for [K Save Slot]. The slot can
not be changed using OI.Share.
• If only one card is inserted, OI.Share will access it automatically.
• Movies are recorded to the card used for photographs, regardless of the option selected
for [n Save Slot].
Wi-Fi• If Wi-Fi seems sluggish, try using Wi-Fi with Bluetooth disabled on the smartphone.

134 EN

Connecting to a smartphone
Connect to a smartphone. Start the OI.Share App installed on your smartphone.

1

Select [Connection to Smartphone] in the q Playback Menu and press the
Q button.

2

Following the guide displayed on the monitor, proceed with the Wi-Fi settings.

• You can also connect by tapping w in the monitor.
• The SSID, password and QR code are displayed on the monitor.
100%

Preparing Wi-Fi Connection
Connecting to yoursmartphone.
Read QR code by'OLYMPUS Image Share'.

QR codeSSID: X-XXXXX-X-XXXXXXXX
Password : 00000000

End Wi-Fi

3

Start OI.Share on your smartphone, and read the QR code displayed on thecamera monitor.
• Connection will be performed automatically.
• Some smartphones will need to be configured manually after reading the QR code.
• If you are unable to read the QR code, enter the SSID and password in the Wi-Fi
settings of your smartphone to connect. For how to access the Wi-Fi settings on yoursmartphone, please see your smartphone operating instructions.

4

To end the connection, press MENU on the camera or tap [End Wi-Fi] on themonitor screen.
• You can also end the connection with OI.Share or by turning off your camera.
• The connection ends.

5
Connecting the camera to a smartphone

SSID
Password

3/3

EN 135

Transferring images to a smartphone
You can select images in the camera and load them to a smartphone. You can also
use the camera to select images you want to share in advance. g “Setting a transfer
order on images (Share Order)” (P. 82)

1Connect the camera to a smartphone (P. 135).

Wi-Fi• You can also connect by tapping w in themonitor.
Wi-Fi

ISO-A

200

5
Connecting the camera to a smartphone
136 EN

250 F5.6

2

Launch OI.Share and tap the Image Transfer button.

3

Select the pictures you want to transfer and tap the Save button.

• The images in the camera are displayed in a list.
• When saving is completed, you can turn off the camera from the smartphone.

Shooting remotely with a smartphone
You can shoot remotely by operating the camera with a smartphone.
This is available only in [Private].

1

Start [Connection to Smartphone] on the camera.

2
3

Launch OI.Share and tap the Remote button.

• You can also connect by tapping w in the monitor.

Tap the shutter button to shoot.
• The image taken is saved on the memory card in the camera.

• Available shooting options are partially limited.

1:02:0330

Adding position information to images
You can add GPS tags to images that were taken while the GPS log was saving bytransferring the GPS log saved on the smartphone to the camera.
This is available only in [Private].

1

Before beginning to shoot, launch OI.Share and turn on the switch on the Add
Location button to begin saving the GPS log.
• Before beginning to save the GPS log, the camera must be connected to OI.Shareonce to synchronize the time.
• You can use the phone or other apps while the GPS log is saving. Do not terminate
OI.Share.

When shooting is complete, turn off the switch on the Add Location button.
Saving the GPS log is complete.

3

Start [Connection to Smartphone] on the camera.

4

Transfer the saved GPS log to the camera using OI.Share.

• You can also connect by tapping w in the monitor.
• GPS tags are added to the images in the memory card based on the transferred GPSlog.
• g is displayed on images to which position information has been added.

• Addition of location information can only be used with smartphones that have a GPSfunction.
• Position information cannot be added to movies.

Changing the connection method
There are two ways to connect to a smartphone. With [Private] the same settings areused to connect every time. With [One-Time] different settings are used each time. You
may find it convenient to use [Private] when connecting to your own smartphone and[One-Time] when transferring images to a friend’s smartphone etc.
The default setting is [Private].

1
2
3

Select [Wi-Fi Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press the Q button.

5
Connecting the camera to a smartphone2

Select [Wi-Fi Connect Settings] and press I.
Select the wireless LAN connection method and press the Q button.
• [Private]: Connect to one smartphone (connects automatically using the settings after
the initial connection). All OI.Share functions are available.
• [One-Time]: Connect to multiple smartphones (connects using different connection
settings each time). Only OI.Share’s image transfer function is available. You canview only images that are set for share order using the camera.
• [Select]: Select which method to use each time.
• [Off]: The Wi-Fi function is turned off.

EN 137

Changing the password
Change the password used for [Private].

1
2
3

Select [Wi-Fi Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press the Q button.
Select [Private Password] and press I.
Follow the operation guide and press the R button.
• A new password will be set.

Cancelling a share order5
Connecting the camera to a smartphone
138 EN

Cancel share orders that are set on images.

1
2
3

Select [Wi-Fi Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press the Q button.
Select [Reset share Order] and press I.
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• The share order for images saved on the card being used for playback will becanceled.

Initializing wireless LAN settings
Initializes content of [Wi-Fi Connect Settings].

1
2
3

Select [Wi-Fi Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press the Q button.
Select [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] and press I.
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

6

Connecting the camera to a computerand a printerConnecting the camera to a computer
USB connector

Smaller terminal

USB port
USB cable

6
Connecting the camera to a computer and a printer• If nothing is displayed on the camera screen even after connecting the camera to thecomputer, the battery may be exhausted. Use a full-charged battery.
• When the camera is turned on, a dialog should be displayed in the monitor prompting
you to choose a host. If it is not, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 117) in the camera custom
menus.

EN 139

Copying pictures to a computer
The following operating systems are compatible with the USB connection:
Windows:
Macintosh:

6
Connecting the camera to a computer and a printer
140 EN

Windows Vista SP2/Windows 7 SP1/Windows 8/
Windows 8.1/Windows 10
Mac OS X v10.8 - v10.11

1

Turn the camera off and connect it to the computer.

2

Turn on the camera.

3

Press FG to select [Storage]. Press the Q
button.

• The location of the USB port varies with the computer. For details, refer to yourcomputer’s manual.
100%• The selection screen for the USB connection isdisplayed.

USB
Storage
MTP
0Print
PCM Recorder
Exit
Set

4

The computer recognizes the camera as a new device.

• If you are using Windows Photo Gallery, choose [MTP] in Step 3.
• Data transfer is not guaranteed in the following environments, even if your computer isequipped with a USB port.
Computers with a USB port added by means of an extension card, etc., computers
without a factory-installed OS, or home-built computers• Camera controls cannot be used while the camera is connected to a computer.
• When [0] is selected, camera controls can be used even while the camera isconnected to a computer.
• If the dialog shown in Step 2 is not displayed when the camera is connected to acomputer, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 117) in the camera custom menus.

Installing the PC software
The photographs and movies you have shot with your camera can be transferred to acomputer and viewed, edited, and organized using the OLYMPUS Viewer 3 offered by
OLYMPUS.
• To install OLYMPUS Viewer 3, download it from http://support.olympus-imaging.com/
ov3download/ and follow the on-screen instructions.
• Visit the website above for system requirements and installation instructions.
• You will be required to enter the product serial number prior to download.

Installing the OLYMPUS Digital Camera Updater
Camera firmware updates can only be performed using the OLYMPUS Digital Camera
Updater. Download the updater from the website below and install it according to theon-screen instructions.
http://oup.olympus-imaging.com/ou1download/index/

Visit the OLYMPUS website for information on registering your OLYMPUS products.

Connecting the camera to a computer and a printerUser Registration

6

EN 141

Direct printing (PictBridge)
By connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer with the USB cable, you
can print out recorded pictures directly.

1

Connect the camera to the printer using the supplied USB cable and turn thecamera on.
USB connector

Smaller terminal

6

USB port

Connecting the camera to a computer and a printerUSB cable• Use a fully charged battery for printing.
• When the camera is turned on, a dialog should be displayed in the monitor prompting
you to choose a host. If it is not, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 117) in the camera
custom menus.

2

Use FG to select [Print].

USB

100%

• [One Moment] will be displayed, followed by a printmode selection dialog.
• If the screen is not displayed after a few minutes,
disconnect the USB cable and start again from Step 1.

Storage
MTP
0Print
PCM Recorder
Exit
Set

Proceed to “Custom printing” (P. 143)
• RAW images and movies cannot be printed.

Easy printing
Use the camera to display the picture you wish to print before connecting the printervia the USB cable.

1

Use HI to display the pictures you want to print
on the camera.

2

Press I.
• The picture selection screen appears when printing iscompleted. To print another picture, use HI to selectthe image and press the Q button.

100%

Easy Print Start
PC/Custom Print• To exit, unplug the USB cable from the camera while the picture selection screen isdisplayed.

142 EN

Custom printing

1

Connect the camera to the printer using the supplied USB cable and turn thecamera on.
• When the camera is turned on, a dialog should be displayed in the monitor prompting
you to choose a host. If it is not, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 117) in the camera
custom menus.

2

Follow the operation guide to set a print option.
Selecting the print mode
Select the type of printing (print mode). The available print modes are as shown below.
Prints selected pictures.

All Print

Prints all the pictures stored in the card and makes one print foreach picture.

Multi Print

Prints multiple copies of one image in separate frames on a single
sheet.

All Index

Prints an index of all the pictures stored in the card.

Print Order

Prints according to the print reservation you made. If there is no
picture with print reservation, this is not available.

6

Setting the print paper items
This setting varies with the type of printer. If only the printer’s STANDARD setting isavailable, you cannot change the setting.
Size

Sets the paper size that the printer supports.

BorderlessSelects whether the picture is printed on the entire page or inside a
blank frame.

Pics/Sheet

Selects the number of pictures per sheet. Displayed when you haveselected [Multi Print].

Selecting pictures you want to print
Select pictures you want to print. The selected pictures canbe printed later (single-frame reservation) or the picture
you are displaying can be printed right away.

100%

123-3456
2017.01.01 12:30:00

SelectSingle Print

Print f

15

Print
More

Prints the currently displayed picture. If there is a picture that [Single
Print C] reservation has already been applied to, only that reserved
picture will be printed.

Applies print reservation to the currently displayed picture. If you
Single Print C want to apply reservation to other pictures after applying [Single
Print C], use HI to select them.
More E

Connecting the camera to a computer and a printer

Print

Sets the number of prints and other items for the currently displayed
picture, and whether or not to print it. For operation, refer to “Setting
printing data” in the next section.

EN 143

Setting printing data
Select whether to print printing data such as the date and time or file name on the picture
when printing. When the print mode is set to [All Print], select [Option Set].

3<×

Sets the number of prints.

Date

Prints the date and time recorded on the picture.

File Name

Prints the file name recorded on the picture.

P

Trims the picture for printing. Use the front dial (r) to choose thecrop size and FGHI to specify the crop position.

Once you have set the pictures for printing and printing data, select [Print],
then press the Q button.
• The setting will be applied to the images saved on the card being used for playback.
• To stop and cancel printing, press the Q button. To resume printing, select[Continue].

6
Connecting the camera to a computer and a printer
144 EN
Cancelling printing
To cancel printing, highlight [Cancel] and press the Q button. Note that any changes to theprint order will be lost; to cancel printing and return to the previous step, where you can makechanges to the current print order, press MENU.

Print order (DPOF)
You can save digital “print orders” to the memory card listing the pictures to be printed
and the number of copies of each print. You can then have the pictures printed at a
print shop that supports DPOF or print the pictures yourself by connecting the camera
directly to a DPOF printer. A memory card is required when creating a print order.

Creating a print order

1
2

Press the Q button during playback and select [Print Order].
Select [<] or [<ALL] and press the Q button.
Individual picture
Press HI to select the frame that you want to set as print
reservation, then press FG to set the number of prints.
• To set print reservation for several pictures, repeat thisstep. Press the Q button when all the desired pictures
have been selected.
All pictures
Select [<ALL] and press the Q button.

100%

Print Order

<
ALL

Back

Set

3

Select the date and time format and press the Q
button.
No

The pictures are printed without the date and
time.

Date

The pictures are printed with the shooting
date.

Time

The pictures are printed with the shooting
time.

100%

No
Date
Time

Back

Set

• When printing images, the setting cannot be changed
between the images.

4

Select [Set] and press the Q button.
• The setting will be applied to the images saved on the card being used for playback.

• The camera cannot be used to modify print orders created with other devices. Creating a
new print order deletes any existing print orders created with other devices.
• Print orders cannot include RAW images or movies.

You can reset all print reservation data or just the data for selected pictures.

1
2

Press the Q button during playback and select [Print Order].

3

Press HI to select images you wish to remove from the print order.

4

Select the date and time format and press the Q button.

5

Select [Set] and press the Q button.

Select [<] and press the Q button.
• To remove all pictures from the print order, select [Reset] and press the Q button. To
exit without removing all pictures, select [Keep] and press the Q button.
• Use G to set the number of prints to 0. Press the Q button once you have removed
all the desired pictures from the print order.
• This setting is applied to all frames with print reservation data.
• The setting will be applied to the images saved on the card being used for playback.

Connecting the camera to a computer and a printerRemoving all or selected pictures from the print order6

EN 145

7 Cautions
Battery and charger

7
Cautions• The camera uses a single Olympus lithium-ion battery. Never use any battery other thangenuine OLYMPUS batteries.
• The camera’s power consumption varies widely with usage and other conditions.
• As the following consume a lot of power even without shooting, the battery will be drained
quickly.
• Performing auto focus repeatedly by pressing the shutter button halfway in shootingmode.
• Displaying images on the monitor for a prolonged period.
• When connected to a computer or printer.
• When using a drained battery, the camera may turn off without the low battery warning
being displayed.
• The battery will not be fully charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery using theprovided charger before use.
• If you will not be using the camera for a prolonged period (one month or more), remove
the battery from the camera.
Make sure not to leave the battery inside the camera for a long time, or else the battery
life may be shortened or the battery may become unusable.
• The normal charging time using the provided charger is approximately 2 hours(estimated).
• Do not attempt to use chargers not specifically designated for use with the supplied
battery, or to use batteries not specifically designated for use with the supplied charger.
• There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced with the incorrect battery type.
• Dispose of the used battery following the instructions “CAUTION” (P. 182) in the instruction
manual.

Using the optional AC adapter
The optional AC-5 AC adapter can be used with the power battery holder (HLD-9). (P. 150)
Use only the appropriate AC adapter. Do not use the power cord included with the AC
adapter with any other products.

146 ENUsing your charger abroad• The charger can be used in most home electrical sources within the range of 100 V to240 V AC (50/60 Hz) around the world. However, depending on the country or area you
are in, the AC wall outlet may be shaped differently and the charger may require a plug
adapter to match the wall outlet.
• Do not use commercially available travel adapters as the charger may malfunction.

Usable cards
In this manual, all storage devices are referred to as “cards.” Thefollowing types of SD memory card (commercially available) can beused with this camera: SD, SDHC, SDXC, and Eye-Fi. For the latest
information, please visit the Olympus website.
SD card write protect switch
The SD card body has a write protect switch. Setting the switch to“LOCK” prevents data being written to the card. Return the switch tothe unlock position enable writing.

LOCK

Cautions• The data in the card will not be erased completely even after formatting the card ordeleting the data. When discarding, destroy the card to prevent leakage of personal
information.
• Use the Eye-Fi card in compliance with the laws and regulations of the country where thecamera is used. Remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera or disable the card functions in
airplanes and other locations where use is prohibited. g [Eye-Fi] (P. 122)• The Eye-Fi card may become hot during use.
• When using an Eye-Fi card, the battery may run out faster.
• When using an Eye-Fi card, the camera may function more slowly.
• Failure may occur during My Clips shooting. Please turn off the card function in this case.
• Setting the write protect switch to “LOCK” may limit such functions as clip shooting andplayback.

7

EN 147

Record mode and file size/number of storable still pictures
The file size in the table is approximate for files with a 4:3 aspect ratio.
Record mode

50M F+RAW

25M F+RAW
50M F
25M F

Image size
(Pixel Count)10368×7776
8160×6120
5184×3888
10368×7776
5760×4320
5184×3888
8160×6120
5760×4320

RAW

7
Cautions

YSF
YF
YN
YB
XSF
XF
XN
XB
XSF
XF
XN
XB
XSF
XF
XN
XB
XSF
XF
XN
XB
WSF
WF
WN
WB
WSF
WF
WN
WB

5184×3888

3200×2400

2560×1920

1920×1440

1600×1200

1280×960

1024×768

Compression
Uncompressed
1/4
Uncompressed
Uncompressed
1/4
Uncompressed
1/4
1/4
Loss-lesscompression
1/2.7
1/4
1/8
1/12
1/2.7
1/4
1/8
1/12
1/2.7
1/4
1/8
1/12
1/2.7
1/4
1/8
1/12
1/2.7
1/4
1/8
1/12
1/2.7
1/4
1/8
1/12
1/2.7
1/4
1/8
1/12

File
format
ORF
JPEG
ORI
ORF
JPEG
ORI
JPEG
JPEG

File size (MB)Number ofstorable still
pictures*

181.5

42

169.5

44

Approx. 21.7
Approx. 10.9

317
630

ORF

Approx. 21.5

341

JPEG

Approx. 13.1
Approx. 8.9
Approx. 4.6
Approx. 3.1
Approx. 5.1
Approx. 3.6
Approx. 1.9
Approx. 1.4
Approx. 3.4
Approx. 2.4
Approx. 1.3
Approx. 1.0
Approx. 2.0
Approx. 1.4
Approx. 0.9
Approx. 0.7
Approx. 1.5
Approx. 1.1
Approx. 0.7
Approx. 0.5
Approx. 1.0
Approx. 0.8
Approx. 0.5
Approx. 0.4
Approx. 0.8
Approx. 0.6
Approx. 0.3
Approx. 0.2

527
774
1506
2219
1348
1952
3698
5194
2051
2941
5424
7397
3487
4882
8418
11096
4786
6597
11096
13562
6781
9041
14360
17437
9389
12206
30515
40687

* Assumes a 8GB SD card.
• The number of storable still pictures may change according to the subject, whether or notprint reservations have been made, and other factors. In certain instances, the numberof storable still pictures displayed on the monitor will not change even when you takepictures or erase stored images.
• The actual file size varies according to the subject.
• The maximum number of storable still pictures displayed on the monitor is 9999.
• For the available recording time for movies, see the Olympus website.

148 EN

Interchangeable lenses
Choose a lens according to the scene and your creative intent. Use
lenses designed exclusively for the Micro Four Thirds system andbearing the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL label or the symbol shown at right.
With an adapter, you can also use Four Thirds System and OM Systemlenses. The optional adapter is required.
• When you attach or remove the body cap and lens from the camera, keep the lens mounton the camera pointed downward. This helps prevent dust and other foreign matter fromgetting inside the camera.
• Do not remove the body cap or attach the lens in dusty places.
• Do not point the lens attached to the camera toward the sun. This may cause the camera
to malfunction or even ignite due to the magnifying effect of sunlight focusing through thelens.
• Be careful not to lose the body cap and rear cap.
• Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is
attached.

Lens and camera combinations
Lens

CameraFour Thirds system lens

Micro Four Thirds systemcameraOM System lenses
Micro Four Thirds system Four Thirds System
lens
CameraAF

Metering

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes*1

Yes

No

Yes*2

No

No

Attachment
possiblewith mountadapterNo

7
Cautions

Micro Four Thirds system
lens

Attachment*1 AF is not operational when recording movies.
*2 Accurate metering is not possible.

EN 149HLD-9 Power Battery Holder
This can be used along with the battery in the camera body to extend the camera's
operating time. You can assign functions to the dial and B-Fn button in the Custom
Menu. The optional AC adapter can be used with the HLD-9.
Make sure to turn the camera off when attaching and removing the holder.
Part names
AC terminal coverB-Fn2 button
Front dial
Shutter button
Rear dial
B-Fn1 button

Removal knob
Arrow padQ button
Vertical shooting lock7


Attaching the holder

Cautions

Remove the PBH cover (a) on the bottomof the camera before attaching the
HLD-9. Once attached, make sure the
HLD-9 removal knob is tightly secured.
Make sure to attach the PHB cover to thecamera when not using the HLD-9.

a

a


Loading the battery
Use BLH-1 battery. Once you load the battery, make sure to lock the battery cover.
Direction indicating mark1

2

150 EN
Using the AC adapter
Open the AC terminal cover and plug the AC adapter into the AC
terminal.

Using the dials and buttons

You can set the HLD-9 dial and B-Fn button functions in [K Button Function] and[n Button Function] of the Custom Menu. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button
Function)” (P. 66), [K Button Function] (P. 113), [n Button Function] (P. 100)Main Specifications (HLD-9)
Power Supply

Battery: BLH-1 Lithium-ion Battery x 1
AC power: AC-5 AC Adapter

Dimensions

Approx. 132.7 mm (W) × 55.8 mm (H) × 66.0 mm (D)(5.2" × 2.2" × 2.6")

WeightApprox. 255 g (9.0 oz.) (excluding battery and terminal cap)

Splash resistance(when attached to camera)

Type
Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1
(under OLYMPUS test conditions)

Cautions

Note• Use only the designated battery and AC adapter. Failure to do so could result in injury,
damage to the product, and fire.
• Do not use your nail to turn the removal knob. Doing so could result in injury.
• Only use the camera within the guaranteed operating temperature range.
• Do not use or store the product in dusty or humid areas.
• Do not touch the electrical contacts.
• Use a dry, soft cloth to clean the terminals. Do not clean the product with a damp cloth,thinner, benzine, or any other organic solvents.

7

EN 151External flash units designated for use with this camera
With this camera, you can use one of the separately sold external flash units toachieve a flash suited to your needs. The external flashes communicate with thecamera, allowing you to control the camera’s flash modes with various available flash
control modes, such as TTL-AUTO and Super FP flash. An external flash unit specified
for use with this camera can be mounted on the camera by attaching it to the camera’s
hot shoe. You can also attach the flash to the flash bracket on the camera using thebracket cable (optional). Refer to the documentation provided with the external flash
units as well.
The upper limit of the shutter speed is 1/250 sec. when using a flash.
* The sync speed for silent mode and focus bracketing (P. 94) is 1/50 second. The sync
speed at ISO sensitivities of 8000 and above and during ISO bracketing (P. 94) is
1/20 second.

Functions available with external flash units
Optional flash

7

FL-900R

Cautions

FL-600R
FL-300R
FL-14
STF-8

Flash control mode
TTL-AUTO, AUTO,
MANUAL, FP TTL
AUTO, FP MANUAL,
MULTI, RC, SL AUTO,
SL MANUAL
TTL-AUTO, AUTO,
MANUAL, FP TTL
AUTO, FP MANUAL
TTL-AUTO, MANUAL
TTL-AUTO, AUTO,
MANUALTTL-AUTO, MANUAL

GN (Guide number) (ISO100)

RC modeGN58 (200 mm*1)

GN36 (85 mm*1) GN20 (24 mm*1)

GN20 (28 mm*1)

GN14 (28 mm* )

–

GN8.5



1

*1 The focal length of the lens that can be used (Calculated based on 35 mm film camera).

152 ENWireless remote control flash photography
External flash units that are designated for use with this camera and have a remotecontrol mode can be used for wireless flash photography. The camera can separately
control each of three groups of remote flash units, and the internal flash. See theinstruction manuals provided with the external flash units for details.

1

Set the remote flash units to RC mode and place them as desired.

2

Select [On] for [# RC Mode] in X Shooting Menu 2 (P. 86).

3

Adjust the settings for each group in the LV super control panel.

• Turn the external flash units on, press the MODE button, and select RC mode.
• Select a channel and group for each external flash unit.
• The LV super control panel switches to RC mode.
• You can choose an LV super control panel display by repeatedly pressing the INFO
button.
• Select a flash mode (note that red-eye reduction is not available in RC mode).

Adjust settings for the camera
flash unit.

Flash intensity
value

A Mode
TTL
M
Off
TTL

P

+5.0
1/8
–
+3.0

Ch

LO
1

Communication light level• Set the communication
light level to [HI], [MID],or [LO].

250 F5.6

Flash control
mode

4

Normal flash/Super FP flash• Switch between normal
flash and Super FP flash.

100%

38

7
CautionsGroup• Select the flash control
mode and adjust the flash
intensity separately foreach group. For MANUAL,
select the flash intensity.

Channel• Set the communication
channel to the samechannel used on the flash.

Flash intensity

Attach the supplied flash unit and turn on the camera.
• After confirming that the built-in and remote flash units have charged, take a test
shot.


Wireless flash control range
Position the wireless flash units with their remote sensors facing the camera. The following
illustration shows the approximate ranges at which the flash units can be positioned. The
actual control range varies with local conditions.
• We recommend using a single group of up to
three remote flash units.
• Remote flash units cannot be used forsecond curtain slow synchronization or antishock exposures longer than 4 seconds.
• If the subject is too close to the camera,
the control flashes emitted by the camera
flash may affect exposure (this effect can be
reduced by reducing the output of the camera
flash by, for example, using a diffuser).
• The upper limit of flash synchronization
timing is 1/250 sec. when using the flash in
RC mode.

30°
60°

30°

7m
50°
100°

50°

5m

EN 153Other external flash units
Connect a sync cord to the hot shoe or the external flash terminal. When not using theexternal flash terminal, make sure to attach the cap.
Note the following when using a third-party flash unit mounted on the camera hot shoe:• Using obsolete flash units that apply currents of more than about 250 V to the X-contact
will damage the camera.
• Connecting flash units with signal contacts that do not conform to Olympus specifications
may damage the camera.
• Set the Shooting mode to M, set the shutter speed to a value no higher than flash
synchronous speed, and set ISO sensitivity to a setting other than [AUTO].
• Flash control can only be performed by manually setting the flash to the ISO sensitivity
and aperture values selected with the camera. Flash brightness can be adjusted byadjusting either ISO sensitivity or aperture.
• Use a flash with an angle of illumination suited to the lens. Angle of illumination is usually
expressed using 35-mm format equivalent focal lengths.

7
Cautions
154 ENPrincipal Accessories
Remote cable (RM-CB2)
Use when the slightest camera movement can result in blurred pictures, for example
for macro or bulb photography. Connect the cable to the camera remote cable terminal(P. 11).

Converter lenses
Converter lenses attach to the camera lens for quick and easy fish-eye or macro
photography. See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses that can beused.

Eyecup (EP-13)
You can switch to a large-size eyecup.
Removal7
Cautions

2
1

EN 155

System chart

Connection
Cable

Viewfinder

Power Supply

USB Cable /HDMI Cable

BLH-1

BCH-1

Lithium-ion
battery

Lithium-ion Charger

HLD-9

AC-5

Power Battery
Holder

AC Adapter

EP-13
Eyecup7
Cautions

RemoteOperation
RM-CB2
Remote Cable

Case / Strap

Shoulder Strap /Camera Case

Underwater
SystemWaterproof
protector

Headphone

Microphone

SoftwareMemory Card*3

SD/SDHC/
SDXC/Eye-Fi

OLYMPUS Viewer 3
Digital Photo Managing Software: E-M1 Mark II compatible products: Commercially available products

For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website.

*1 Not all lenses can be used with adapter. For details, refer to the Olympus Official Web Site. Also, please
note that manufacture of OM System Lenses has been discontinued.
*2 For compatible lens, refer to the Olympus Official Web Site.
*3 Use the Eye-Fi card in compliance with the laws and regulations of the country where the camera is used.
*4 Only available for ED 40-150mm f2.8 PRO and ED 300mm f4.0 IS PRO.

156 EN

Converter
Lens*2Lens
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 8mm f1.8 Fisheye PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12mm f2.0
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 25mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 45mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 25mm f1.2 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 30mm f3.5 Macro
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 60mm f2.8 Macro
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 75mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 7-14mm f2.8 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 9-18mm f4.0-5.6
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-40mm f2.8 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-50mm f3.5-6.3 EZ
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-100mm f4.0
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-42mm f3.5-5.6 EZ
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-42mm f3.5-5.6 II R
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-150mm f4.0-5.6
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 40-150mm f4.0-5.6 R
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 40-150mm f2.8 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 75-300mm f4.8-6.7 II
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 300mm f4.0 IS PRO

FCON-P01
Fisheye

WCON-P01
Wide

MCON-P01
Macro

MCON-P02
Macro

Cautions

Teleconverter MC-14*4

MMF-2/MMF-3*1
Four Thirds Adapter

7

Four Thirds System Lenses

OM System Lenses

MF-2*1OM Adapter 2

Flash

FL-300R
FL-14

FL-900R

Electronic FlashElectronic Flash

FL-600R

STF-8

Electronic Flash

Macro FlashElectronic FlashEN 157

Cleaning and storing the camera
Cleaning the camera
Turn off the camera and remove the battery before cleaning the camera.
• Do not use strong solvents such as benzene or alcohol, or a chemically treated cloth.

Exterior:• Wipe gently with a soft cloth. If the camera is very dirty, soak the cloth in mild soapy water
and wring well. Wipe the camera with the damp cloth and then dry it with a dry cloth. If you
have used the camera at the beach, use a cloth soaked in clean water and well wrung.

Monitor:• Wipe gently with a soft cloth.

Lens:• Blow dust off the lens with a commercially available blower. For the lens, wipe gently witha lens cleaning paper.

7

Storage

Cautions• When not using the camera for a prolonged period, remove the battery and card. Storethe camera in a cool, dry place that is well ventilated.
• Insert the battery periodically and test the camera’s functions.
• Remove dust and other foreign matter from the body and rear caps before attaching them.
• Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is
attached. Be sure to replace the front and rear lens caps before putting the lens away.
• Clean the camera after use.
• Do not store with insect repellent.
• Avoid storing the camera in places where chemicals are treated, in order to protect thecamera from corrosion.
• Mold may form on the lens surface if the lens is left dirty.
• Check each part of the camera before use if it has not been used for a long time. Before
taking important pictures, be sure to take a test shot and check that the camera works
properly.

Cleaning and checking the image pickup device
This camera incorporates a dust reduction function to keep dust from getting on theimage pickup device and to remove any dust or dirt from the image pickup device
surface with ultrasonic vibrations. The dust reduction function operates when thecamera is turned on.
The dust reduction function operates at the same time as the pixel mapping, whichchecks the image pickup device and image processing circuitry. Since dust reductionis activated every time the camera’s power is turned on, the camera should be held
upright for the dust reduction function to be effective.

158 EN

Pixel Mapping - Checking the image processing functions
The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to check and adjust the image pickup
device and image processing functions. After using the monitor or taking continuous
shots, wait for at least one minute before using the pixel mapping function to ensurethat it operates correctly.

1
2

In Custom Menu b, select [Pixel Mapping] (P. 122).
Press I, then press the Q button.
• The [Busy] bar is displayed when pixel mapping is in progress. When pixel mapping
is finished, the menu is restored.

• If you accidentally turn the camera off during pixel mapping, start again from Step 1.

After Service

7
Cautions• A warranty is provided at the dealer from whom you purchased the camera. Make sure it
includes the name of the store and the purchase date. If one or both of these items are
missing, make sure to contact the dealer right away. Carefully read the warranty and store
it in a safe place.
• Contact the dealer from whom you purchased the camera or an Olympus service center
for after service or if the product malfunctions. If the product malfunctions within one yearof the purchase date despite using it according to the instruction manual, Olympus will
repair it free of charge based on the warranty.
• Repairs after the warranty period has expired incur fees as a rule.
• After the product has been discontinued, after service will be available for a periodof 7 years. However, after service repairs or replacing the product with an equal item
(product exchange) at Olympus' discretion is based on the type of malfunction, whether
or not replacement parts are available, and the period of time for retaining the parts (parts
are generally retained for a period of 7 years after production is discontinued).
• Olympus accepts no responsibility for incidental damages caused by product malfunction(expenses entailed during shooting, and loss of profits from shooting). The customer is
responsible for all shipping and handling costs.
• When sending in a product for repairs, make sure it is adequately packed and includes a
written notice detailing what needs to be repaired. Make sure to use a package delivery
service or registered parcel shipping and obtain a receipt.

EN 1598 Information
Shooting tips and information
The camera does not turn on even when a battery is loaded
The battery is not fully charged• Charge the battery with the charger.

The battery is temporarily unable to function because of the cold
• Battery performance drops at low temperatures. Remove the battery and warm it byputting it in your pocket for a while.

No picture is taken when the shutter button is pressed
The camera has turned off automatically8
Information• If power saving is enabled, the camera will enter sleep mode if no operations are
performed for a set period. Press the shutter button halfway to exit the sleep mode.
• The camera automatically enters sleep mode to reduce the drain on the battery if nooperations are performed for a set period of time. g [Sleep] (P. 122)
If no operations are performed for a set time after the camera has entered sleep mode,the camera will turn off automatically. g [Auto Power Off] (P. 122)

The flash is charging• On the monitor, the # mark blinks when charging is in progress. Wait for the blinking tostop, then press the shutter button.

Unable to focus• The camera cannot focus on subjects that are too close to the camera or that are notsuited to autofocus (the AF confirmation mark will blink in the monitor). Increase thedistance to the subject or focus on a high contrast object at the same distance from thecamera as your main subject, compose the shot, and shoot.
Subjects that are difficult to focus on
It may be difficult to focus with auto focus in the following situations.
AF confirmation
mark is blinking.
These subjects
are not focused.
Subject with low
contrast

Excessively bright
light in center of frame

Subject containing
no vertical lines

Subjects at different
distances

Fast-moving subject

Subject not inside
AF area

AF confirmation
mark lights up but
the subject is not
focused.

160 EN

Noise reduction is activated• When shooting night scenes, shutter speeds are slower and noise tends to appear inimages. The camera activates the noise-reduction process after shooting at slow shutter
speeds. During which, shooting is not allowed. You can set [Noise Reduct.] to [Off].
g [Noise Reduct.] (P. 118)

The number of AF targets is reduced
The size and number of the AF target changes depending on the [Digital Tele-converter](P. 88), [Image Aspect] (P. 54), and group target (P. 39) settings.

The date and time has not been set
The camera is used with the settings at the time of purchase• The date and time of the camera is not set when purchased. Set the date and time before
using the camera. g “Setting the date/time” (P. 19)

The battery has been removed from the camera• The date and time settings will be returned to the factory default settings if the camera isleft without the battery for approximately 1 day. The settings will be canceled more quickly
if the battery was only loaded in the camera for a short time before being removed. Before
taking important pictures, check that the date and time settings are correct.

Set functions are restored to their factory default settings

Image taken appears whitish
This may occur when the picture is taken in backlight or semi-backlight conditions. This isdue to a phenomenon called flare or ghosting. As far as possible, consider a composition
where strong light source is not taken in the picture. Flare may occur even when a lightsource is not present in the picture. Use a lens hood to shade the lens from the lightsource. If a lens hood does not have effect, use your hand to shade the lens from the light.
g “Interchangeable lenses” (P. 149)

8
Information

When you rotate the mode dial or turn off the power in a shooting mode other than P, A,
S, or M, functions with changes made to their settings are restored to the factory default
settings.

Unknown bright dot(s) appear on the subject in the picture taken
This may be due to stuck pixel(s) on the image pickup device. Perform [Pixel Mapping].
If the problem persists, repeat pixel mapping a few times. g “Pixel Mapping - Checking theimage processing functions” (P. 159)

Functions that cannot be selected from menus
Some items may not be selectable from the menus when using the arrow pad.
• Items that cannot be set with the current shooting mode.
• Items that cannot be set because of an item that has already been set:
Combinations of [T] (P. 46, 54) and [Noise Reduct.] (P. 118), etc.

The subject appears distorted
The following functions use an electronic shutter:movie recording (P. 36), silent mode (P. 47), Pro Capture shooting (P. 48), High Res Shot (P. 48),
focus bracketing (P. 94)
This may cause distortion if the subject is moving rapidly or the camera is moved abruptly.
Avoid moving the camera abruptly during shooting or use standard sequential shooting.

EN 161

Lines appear in photographs
The following functions use an electronic shutter, which may result in lines due to flicker andother phenomena associated with fluorescent and LED lighting, an effect that can sometimes
be reduced by choosing slower shutter speeds:
movie recording (P. 36), silent mode (P. 47), Pro Capture shooting (P. 48), High Res Shot (P. 48),
focus bracketing (P. 94)

Error codes
Monitorindication

Possible cause
The card is not inserted, or it
cannot be recognized.

Corrective action
Insert a card. Or reinsert the card
properly.

No Card
There is a problem with the cardin slot 1.
5 Card Error

8

There is a problem with the cardin slot 2.

Insert the card again. If the
problem persists, format the card.
If the card cannot be formatted, itcannot be used.

Information

4 Card Error
Writing to the card in slot 1 isprohibited.
5 Write Protect
Writing to the card in slot 2 isprohibited.

The card write-protect switch is
set to the “LOCK” side. Release
the switch. (P. 147)

4 Write Protect
The card is full. No morepictures can be taken or no
more information such as print
reservation can be recorded.

162 EN

5 Card Full

There is no space in the card andprint reservation or new images
Replace the card or erase
cannot be recorded.
unwanted pictures.
Before erasing, download
The card is full. No more
important images to a PC.
pictures can be taken or no
more information such as print
reservation can be recorded.

4 Card Full

There is no space in the card andprint reservation or new images
cannot be recorded.

Monitor
indication

100%

Corrective action

Card cannot be read. Card may
not have been formatted.

• Select [Clean Card], press the
Q and turn off the camera.
Remove the card and wipe themetallic surface with a soft, dry
cloth.
• Select [Format][Yes], and thenpress the Q to format the card.
Formatting the card erases alldata on the card.

There are no pictures on the cardin slot 1.

The card in slot 1 contains no
pictures.
Record pictures and play back.

There are no pictures on the cardin slot 2.

The card in slot 2 contains no
pictures.
Record pictures and play back.

The selected picture cannot be
displayed for playback due toa problem with this picture. Or
the picture cannot be used forplayback on this camera.

Use image processing software toview the picture on a PC.
If that cannot be done, the image
file is damaged.

Pictures taken with anothercamera cannot be edited on thiscamera.

Use image processing software toedit the picture.

Pictures taken with anothercamera cannot be printed on thiscamera.

Use image processing software toprint the picture.

Card Setup
Clean the contact area ofthe card with a dry cloth.

Clean Card
FormatSet

5 No Picture

4 No Picture

5 Picture Error

4 Picture Error

5 The Image
Cannot Be Edited

8
Information

Possible cause

4 The Image
Cannot Be Edited

5 Cannot Print

4 Cannot Print

EN 163

Monitor
indication

Possible cause

Corrective action
Turn off the camera and wait for
the internal temperature to cool.

m
The internal temperature of
the camera has risen due tosequential shooting.

Wait a moment for the camera toturn off automatically.
Allow the internal temperatureof the camera to cool before
resuming operations.

The battery is drained.

Charge the battery.

The camera is not correctly
connected to a computer, printer,
HDMI display, or other device.

Reconnect the camera.

There is no paper in the printer.

Load some paper in the printer.

The printer has run out of ink.

Replace the ink cartridge in theprinter.

The paper is jammed.

Remove the jammed paper.

The printer’s paper cassette has
been removed or the printer has
been manipulated while making
settings on the camera.

Do not manipulate the printerwhile making settings on thecamera.

There is a problem with theprinter and/or camera.

Turn off camera and printer.
Check the printer and remedy any
problems before turning the poweron again.

Pictures recorded on othercameras may not be printed on
this camera.

Use a personal computer to print.

The lens is locked.
Please extend thelens.

The lens of the retractable lensstays retracted.

Extend the lens.

Please check thestatus of a lens.

An abnormality has occurred
between the camera and thelens.

Turn off the camera, check theconnection with the lens, and turnthe power on again.

Internal camera
temperature is toohigh.
Please wait forcooling before
camera use.

Battery Empty

No Connection

8

No PaperInformation

No InkJammedSettings Changed

Print Error

Cannot Print

164 ENMenu directory*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].

K Shooting Menu
Tab

W

Default―
C Natural
YN
4:3
Off
―
o
Off
99
00:00:01
00:00:01
Off

*1

*2

*3























g
86
61, 8855, 8854
88
46, 54,
89





90

8

FullHD
10fps
Off
3f 1.0EV
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
99
5
0 sec
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
z 0 sec[♥] 0 secOff―
Not Allow
Not Allow
Not Allow

91







92

Information

X

Function
Reset / Custom Modes
Picture Mode
KK
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y/i
j/Y
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
Number of Frames
Start Waiting TimeInterval Length
Time Lapse Movie
Movie
Movie
Settings
Resolution
Frame Rate
Bracketing
AE BKT
A– B
WB BKT
G– M
FL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT
Focus BKT
Focus Stacking
Set number of shots
Set focus differential# Charge Time
HDR
Number of FramesMultiple
Auto Gain
Exposure
Overlay
Keystone Comp.
Anti-Shock z
Silent [♥]Noise Reduction [♥]Anti-Shock z/
Silent [♥] Mode Settings
Silent [♥]8
AF IlluminatorFlash Mode

93


94













49, 95





95







97





94

98




EN 165Tab

XHigh Res Shot

FunctionHigh Res Shoth0sec

# Charge Time

0 sec

# RC Mode

Default

*3

g

*1

*2





Off







99,
153

Default
P
MOVn4K
30p
Normal
Off
C-AF
M-IS1

*1

*2

*3

g

99

n Video Menu
TabnFunctionn ModenKn Specificationn Noise Filter
Settings
n Picture Moden AF/ISn AF Mode
Settings
n Image Stabilizer
n Button/Dial/LeverU Function
V Function

8
Information

R Function
t Function
Y Function
Z Function
u Function
u Function
n ButtonFunction

8 Function
u Function
m Functionn Function
v Function
w Function
x Functionl FunctionPn DialFunction

A
S
M

166 EN

AF Area
SelectMulti
FunctionR REC
AEL/AFL
PeakingUuDirectFunction
Electronic
Zoom
kISO/
jWB
AF Area
Select
AEL/AFL
DirectFunction
Electronic
Zoom
kISO/
jWB
AF Stop
ExposureF/
ExposureF
Exposure
F/FNo.
Exposure
F/Shutter
FNo./
Shutter




















102

 43, 51,
 53, 100























100

Tab

n

Functionn Fn Lever Functionn Shutter Functionn Elec. Zoom Speedn Display Settingsn Control Settingsn Info Settings

Time Code
Settings

Time Code Moden HDMI
OutputOutput ModeREC BitTime CodeLive
Control,
Live SCP
Custom1/
Custom2(all onexceptfor Movie
Effect)Drop
Frame
Rec Run0:00:00
min
On
±0
±0
On
Off
Off
Operative
OffOff
8
Monitor
Mode
Off
On

*1

*2

*3





g
100





101

























8
103

Information

Count Up
Starting Time
8 Display PatternMovie K
Built-in K
RecordingVolumeMIC K
K Volume Limiter
Wind Noise Reduction
K Plug-in Power
Camera Rec. Volume
PCM
Recorder K Slate Tone
Link
Synchronized R Rec.
Headphone Volume

Default
mode1
w
Normal








101

EN 167

q Playback Menu
Tab

q
y

Function
Start
BGM
Slide
Slide IntervalMovie Interval

Default―
Party Time
All
3 sec
Short
On

R

Edit

RAW Data
Edit
Sel. Image JPEG Edit
Movie Edit
R
Image Overlay

Print Order
Reset Protect
Copy All
Connection to Smartphone

8

*1

*2

*3

g















80



105

―

105

―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

106
107
83, 107
107
144
108
108
135

d Setup Menu
Tab

InformationdFunction
Card Setup
XW*s
Rec View

Wi-Fi Settings

Firmware

Default――
Englishj ±0, k ±0, Natural
0.5 sec

Wi-Fi Connect
PrivateSettings
PrivatePassword
Reset share
Order
Reset Wi-Fi
Settings

*1







*3

g
110
19
109
109
109



137
―
―
138
―
―

* Settings differ depending on the region where the camera is purchased.

168 EN*2

109

G Custom Menu
Tab

*1 *2 *3

g







43, 51,111

 111, 123













Setting 1







On
All On
On1
Off
5, 6
Set 1
5
I
6
6
On
K
Off
999.9 mOff
Off
Operative
b
On
On






















































Function

Default

G AF/MF
J

S-AF

K AF mode
AEL/AFL

S-AF
C-AF
MF

AF Scanner
C-AF Lock
AF Limiter

111

112

40, 112
112
112
  










































8
Information

Distancesettings
Pri. Rls
5 Settings
AF Area Pointer
K AF Targeting Pad
N Set Home
N Custom SettingskjAB
AF Illuminator
IFace Priority
AF Focus Adj.
L Preset MF distance
Magnify
MF Assist
Peaking
MF Clutch
Focus Ring
Bulb/Time Focusing
Reset Lens

mode1
mode2
mode1
mode2
±0
Off

112, 124

112

EN 169Tab

Function

Default*1 *2 *3g

G Button/Dial/LeverM

K ButtonFunction

U Function
V Function
R Function
t Function
Y Function
Z Function
u Function
u Function
8 Function
u Function
m Functionn Function
v Function
w Function
x Functionl Function

9 Lock8
Information
170 ENK DialFunction

P
A
S
M
Menu
q

Exposure
Dial DirectionPs
K Fn Lever
K Fn Lever Function
Settings
Switch v
Function
Fn Lever/Power LeverK Elec. Zoom Speed

AF Area SelectMulti Function
R REC
AEL/AFL
k
z
u
N
#
j/Y
AF Area Select
AEL/AFLN#j/Y
AF Stop
Off
Exposure F, Ps
Exposure F, FNo.
Exposure F, Shutter
FNo., Shutter
HI, FG/Value

















66, 113

113

GU, Prev/Next
Dial1
Dial1
mode1



Off



113, 124
Fn
Normal






113

Tab

*1 *2 *3

g

Off
On










114

10fps







Off







18fps







Off







18fps







8 shots

On, 25 shots







Function

Default

G Release/j/Image Stabilizer
N Rls Priority S
Rls Priority C
jL Settings
j/♦j

♥j

0

Max fpsFrame Count
Limiter
Max fpsFrame Count
Limiter
Max fpsPre-shutter
FramesFrame Count
Limiter114

jH Settings

G Settings
Picture Mode Settings
j/Y Settings
Multi Function Settings

15fps







Off







60fps







Off







60fps







14 shotsOn, 25 shots







S-IS AUTO
Fps Priority
On
Off











Live Guide
Live SCPArt Menu
Image Only, Overall
All OnImage Only, Custom1 (u),Custom2 (Level Gauge)
25, My Clips, Calendar
All On♥o, S, T, ♥S, ♥T,p, q, h, YC, Y12s
On for settings except f
































114

53, 114

8
Information

Max fpsFrame Count
Limiter
Max fps♥j
Frame Count
Limiter
Max fpsPre-shutter
Frames0
Frame Count
LimiterO K Image Stabilizer
j Image Stabilization
Half Way Rls With IS
Lens I.S. Priority
Disp/8/PC
iAUTO
PK Control
P/A/S/M
Settings
ART
q InfoqU Info
G/InfoSettings
LV-Info
j/♦j

114


115, 125


115, 127

115

EN 171Tab

Function
Default
ManualOn1
Shooting
Bulb/Time
On2
Live View
Boost
Live
Off
Composite
OthersOff
Art LV Mode
mode1
Frame Rate
Normal
LV Close Up
mode2
LV Close Up Mode
Settings
Live View
Off
Boost
Off
z Lockz Settings
Live View
Off
Boost
Flicker reduction
Auto
Display Color Preset 1
R
Displayed Grid Off
Grid Settings
Apply SettingsOn
to EVF
Peaking Color Red
Highlight
NormalPeaking
Intensity
Settings
Image
Brightness
Off
Adj.
Highlight
255
Histogram
Settings
Shadow0Mode Guide
Off
Selfie Assist
On
On
S 8
Output Size
1080p
HDMI Control Off
HDMI
Output Frame
60p Priority
Rate
USB Mode
Auto
Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Tp
Exposure
±0
J
Shift
5
EV Step
1/3EV
ISO Step
1/3EV
Upper Limit / High Limit: 6400 Default:
Default
200
ISO-Auto Set
Lowest S/S
Auto
Setting
ISO-Auto
All
Standard
K Noise Filter
Noise Reduct.
Auto*1 *2 *3g

G Q

8Information
172 EN







115
























































117

117





116

116

116, 129
117
117, 130





































118

Tab

FunctionG U Bulb/Time Timer

Default*1 *2 *3

8min
-7
Off
0.5 sec
1 sec















p







Auto
Spot
On
Spot Highlight On
Spot Shadow On
















# CustomW #X-Sync.
#Slow Limit

1/250
1/60













w+F

Off







#+WB
K/WB/Color

W











































































Bulb/Time Monitor
Live Bulb
Live Time
Composite Settings
V Metering
AEL Metering
N SpotMetering

WB

Auto

Pixel CountAll Set―All x
All Reset―
On
W Keep Warm Color
Color SpacesRGB
Record/EraseY
K SaveStandard
Settings
K Save Slot 5
Card Slotn Save Slot 5
Settings
q Slot5
Assign Save
Do not assign
FolderFile Name
Reset
Edit Filename―
dpi Settings
350dpi
Copyright Info. Off
Copyright
Artist Name―
Settings
Copyright―
Name
Lens Info Settings*
Off

A±0, G±011830, 11845, 51,
118
118

118, 131
39, 60,118
119

119, 131
119
42, 52,
119
119



8
Information

Xiddle
Wmall
Shading Comp.

K1 YF, K2 YN, K3
XN, K4 WN
3200×2400
1280×960
OffX K Setg

11965, 119

120, 132

120

120


120, 132* [Reset] (Full) and [Reset] (Basic) do not reset the info for individual lenses.

EN 173

Tab

FunctionG Z Quick Erase
RAW+JPEG Erase
Priority Set
EVF
a EVF Auto Switch
EVF Auto
Luminance
EVF Adjust
EVF Adjust
EVF Style

8
Information
174 EN

Default
Off
RAW+JPEG
No*1 *2 *3















On
On

g
121




j ±0, k ±0
Style 3
Basic Information, Custom1
V Info Settings(u), Custom2 (level gauge) 
Display Color Preset 1
EVF Grid
Settings
Displayed Grid OffOn
V Half Way Level

S-OVF
Off

K Utility―b Pixel Mapping
0.7 sec
End LV U
Reset LV U
0.7 secFrame
0.7 sec
End 6
Reset 6
0.7 secFrame
0.7 sec
Reset F
0.7 sec
Reset w

0.7 sec
Reset 7
0.7 sec
Reset c
0.7 sec
Reset N

Press-andCall EVF Autohold Time
0.7 secSwitch
0.7 sec
End qU
Switch L 0.7 secInsert Slate
0.7 secTone
0.7 secEnd D
0.7 sec
Reset D
Switch G
0.7 sec
LockCall BKT
0.7 sec
Settings
Level Adjust―
Touchscreen Settings
On
Menu Recall
Recall121121, 133








121


122, 159





















122

Tab

Function
Default
Battery Priority PBH Battery
Settings
Battery Status―
Backlit LCD
Hold
Sleep
1min
Auto Power Off
4h
Quick Sleep Mode
Off
Backlit LCD 8 sec
Sleep
10 secEye-FiOn
Certification―

G c Battery*1 *2 *3




















g

122



Default Custom Mode options
Some functions in Custom Modes are preset to different settings from original default
settings.
• Settings can be reset to the following settings by selecting [Full] for [Reset] (P. 86) in W
Shooting Menu 1.

Custom Mode C1
Custom Mode C1 options
All targets
S
YN+RAW

g
39
90
55

C-AF
On2
On

111
111
112

On1
On2
Off
On1
High
Preset1
1

8
Information

Function
AF target mode
W j/Y/i
KK
G AF/MF
J K AF mode
AF Area Pointer
K AF Targeting Pad
Disp/8/PC
Manual ShootingQ
Bulb/TimeLive View Boost
Live Composite
OthersFrame Rate
Display ColorR
Grid Settings
Displayed Grid

115
115
116

EN 175Custom Mode C2
Function
AF target mode
AF target position
j/Y/i
W KK
G AF/MF
K AF modeJ
AF Area Pointer
K AF Targeting Pad
Disp/8/PC
Manual ShootingQ
Bulb/TimeLive View Boost
Live Composite
OthersFrame Rate
Display ColorR
Grid Settings
Displayed Grid

8
Information
176 EN

Custom Mode C2 options
5-target group
Centerp (pro capture H)
YN+RAW

g
39
40
90
55

S-AF
On1
On

111
111
112

On1
On2
Off
On1
High
Preset1
y

115
115
116

Custom Mode C3
Function
AF target mode
AF target position
j/Y/i
W
KK
G AF/MF
K AF modeJ
AF Area Pointer
K AF Targeting Pad
Disp/8/PC
Manual ShootingQ
Bulb/TimeLive View Boost
Live Composite
OthersFrame Rate
Display ColorR
Grid Settings
Displayed Gridc Quick Sleep Mode

Custom Mode C3 options
I (Single Target)
CenterT
YN+RAW

g
39
40
90
55

S-AF
On1
On

111
111
112

On1
On2
Off
On2
Standard
Preset1
1
On

115
115
116
122

Specifications

CameraProduct type
Product type

Digital camera with interchangeable Micro Four Thirds Standard lenssystemLens

M.Zuiko Digital, Micro Four Thirds System Lens

Lens mount

Micro Four Thirds mount

Equivalent focal length on
a 35 mm film camera

Approx. twice the focal length of the lens

Image pickup device
Product type4/3” Live MOS sensor

Total no. of pixels

Approx. 21.77 million pixels

No. of effective pixels

Approx. 20.37 million pixels

Screen size

17.3 mm (H) × 13.0 mm (V)Aspect ratio

1.33 (4:3)

Viewfinder
TypeElectronic viewfinder with eye sensor

No. of pixels

Approx. 2,360,000 dots

Magnification

100%

Eye point

Approx. 21 mm (–1 m-1)

SensorUses Live MOS sensor

Magnification

100%

Monitor
Product type3.0" TFT color LCD, Vari-angle, touch screen

Total no. of pixels

Approx. 1,040,000 dots (aspect ratio 3 : 2)

Information

Live view

8

Shutter
Product typeComputerized focal-plane shutter

Shutter speed

1/8000 - 60 sec., bulb photography, time photography

Auto focus
Product typeHi-Speed Imager AF

Focusing points

121 points

Selection of focusing point Auto, Optional

Exposure control
Metering system

TTL metering system (imager metering)
Digital ESP metering/Center weighted averaging metering/Spot metering

Metered range

EV –2 - 20 (Equivalent to M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8, ISO100)

Shooting modes

A: iAUTO/P: Program AE (Program shift can be performed)/
A: Aperture priority AE/S: Shutter priority AE/M: Manual/
C1: Custom Mode C1/C2: Custom Mode C2/C3: Custom Mode C3/
n: Movie/ART: Art Filter

ISO sensitivity

LOW, 200 - 25600 (1/3, 1 EV step)

Exposure compensation±5.0EV (1/3, 1/2, 1EV step)

White balance
Product type

Image pickup device

Mode setting

Auto/Preset WB (7 settings)/Customized WB/One-touch WB (camera canstore up to 4 settings)

EN 177

Recording
MemorySD, SDHC, SDXC and Eye-Fi
UHS-II compatible (slot 1)/UHS-I compatible (slot 2)

Recording system

Digital recording, JPEG (DCF2.0), RAW Data

Applicable standards

Exif 2.3, Digital Print Order Format (DPOF), PictBridge

Sound with still pictures

Wave format

Movie

MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 / Motion JPEG

Audio

Stereo, PCM 48kHz

Playback
Display format

Single-frame playback/Close-up playback/Index display/Calendar display

Drive
Drive mode

Single-frame shooting/Sequential shooting/Self-timer

Sequential shooting

Up to 15 fps (T)Up to 60 fps (♥T/p)

Self-timer

Operation time: 12 sec./2 sec./Customized

Energy saving function

Switch to sleep mode: 1 minute, Power OFF: 4 hours(This function can be customized.)

FlashFlash control mode

TTL-AUTO (TTL pre-flash mode)/MANUAL

X-Sync.

1/250 s or slower

8

Wireless LAN

Information

External connector

Compatible standard

IEEE 802.11b/g/n

USB connector (type C)/HDMI micro connector (type D)

Power supply
Battery

Lithium-ion Battery ×1

Dimensions/weight
Dimensions

134.1 mm (W) × 90.9 mm (H) × 68.9 mm (D) (5.3" × 3.6" × 2.7")(excluding protrusions)

WeightApprox. 574 g (1.3 Ib.) (including battery and memory card)

Operating environment
Temperature–10 °C - 40 °C (14 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/ –20 °C - 60 °C (–4 °F - 140 °F)(storage)

Humidity

30% - 90% (operation)/10% - 90% (storage)

Splash resistanceType
Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1 (under
OLYMPUS test conditions)

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks orregistered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

178 EN
Flash
MODEL NO.

FL-LM3

Guide number

9.1 (ISO100•m)
12.7 (ISO200•m)

Firing angle

Covers the picture angle of a 12 mm lens (equivalent to 24 mm in 35 mm
format)Dimensions

Approx. 43.6 mm (W) × 49.4 mm (H) × 39 mm (D) (1.7" × 1.9" × 1.5")

WeightApprox. 51 g (1.8 oz.)

Splash resistanceType Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1 (under
OLYMPUS test conditions)
Lithium-ion battery
MODEL NO.

BLH-1

Type

Rechargeable Lithium-ion battery

Nominal voltage

DC 7.4 V

Nominal capacity

1720 mAh

No. of charge anddischarge times

Approx. 500 times (varies with usage conditions)Ambient temperature

0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (charging)

Dimensions

Approx. 45 mm (W) × 20 mm (H) × 53 mm (D) (1.8" × 0.8" × 2.1")

WeightApprox. 74 g (2.6 oz.)

MODEL NO.

BCH-1

Rated input

AC 100 V - 240 V (50/60 Hz)

Rated output

DC 8.4 V, 1100 mA

Charging time

Approx. 2 hours (room temperature)

Ambient temperature

0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/–20 °C - 60 °C (–4 °F - 140 °F) (storage)

Dimensions

Approx. 71 mm (W) × 29 mm (H) × 96 mm (D) (2.8" × 1.1" × 3.8")

Weight (without AC cable)

Approx. 85 g (3.0 oz.)

Information

Lithium-ion charger

8• The AC cable supplied with this device is for use only with this device and should not be
used with other devices. Do not use cables for other devices with this device.
• SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT ANY NOTICE OR
OBLIGATION ON THE PART OF THE MANUFACTURER.
• Visit our website for the latest specifications.

EN 179

9 SAFETY PRECAUTIONSSAFETY PRECAUTIONSCAUTIONRISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOTREMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED OLYMPUS SERVICE PERSONNEL.
An exclamation mark enclosed in a triangle alerts you to important operating
and maintenance instructions in the documentation provided with the
product.

9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
180 ENWARNING

If the product is used without observing the information given under thissymbol, serious injury or death may result.

CAUTION

If the product is used without observing the information given under thissymbol, injury may result.

NOTICE

If the product is used without observing the information given under thissymbol, damage to the equipment may result.

WARNING!
TO AVOID THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, NEVER DISASSEMBLE, EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT TO WATER OR OPERATE IN A HIGH HUMIDITY ENVIRONMENT.

General Precautions
Read All Instructions — Before you use theproduct, read all operating instructions. Save all
manuals and documentation for future reference.
Power Source — Connect this product only tothe power source described on the product label.
Foreign Objects — To avoid personal injury,
never insert a metal object into the product.
Cleaning — Always unplug this product fromthe wall outlet before cleaning. Use only a damp
cloth for cleaning. Never use any type of liquid oraerosol cleaner, or any type of organic solvent toclean this product.
Heat — Never use or store this product near
any heat source such as a radiator, heat register,
stove, or any type of equipment or appliance thatgenerates heat, including stereo amplifiers.
Attachments — For your safety, and to avoid
damaging the product, use only accessories
recommended by Olympus.
Location — To avoid damage to the product,
mount the product securely on a stable tripod,
stand, or bracket.

WARNING• Do not use the camera near flammable or
explosive gases.
• Rest your eyes periodically when using
the viewfinder.
Failure to observe this precaution could resultin eyestrain, nausea, or sensations similar to
motion sickness. The length and frequencyof the required rest varies with the individual;
use your own judgement. If you feel tired
or unwell, avoid using the viewfinder and if
necessary consult a physician.
• Do not use the flash and LED (including
AF illuminator) on people (infants, smallchildren, etc.) at close range.
• You must be at least 1 m (3 ft.) awayfrom the faces of your subjects. Firing the
flash too close to the subject’s eyes could
cause a momentary loss of vision.
• Do not look at the sun or strong lights
with the camera.

•

•

•

•
•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

• Places where temperatures and/or
humidity are high or go through extremechanges. Direct sunlight, beaches, locked
cars, or near other heat sources (stove,
radiator, etc.) or humidifiers.
• In sandy or dusty environments.
• Near flammable items or explosives.
• In wet places, such as bathrooms or in
the rain.
• In places prone to strong vibrations.
The camera uses a lithium-ion battery
specified by Olympus. Charge the battery
with the specified charger. Do not use anyother chargers.
Never incinerate or heat batteries in
microwaves, on hot plates, or in pressure
vessels, etc.
Never leave the camera on or nearelectromagnetic devices.
This may cause overheating, burning, or
exploding.
Do not connect terminals with any metallic
objects.
Take precautions when carrying or storingbatteries to prevent them from coming into
contact with any metal objects such as
jewelry, pins, fasteners, keys, etc.
The short circuit may cause overheating,
exploding, or burning, which burn or damageyou.
To prevent causing battery leaks or damaging
their terminals, carefully follow all instructions
regarding the use of batteries. Never attempt
to disassemble a battery or modify it in any
way, solder, etc.
If battery fluid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes immediately with clear, coldrunning water and seek medical attention
immediately.
If you cannot remove the battery from thecamera, contact an authorized distributor
or service center. Do not try to remove thebattery by force.
Damage to the battery exterior (scratches,etc.) may produce heat or an explosion.
Always store batteries out of the reach ofsmall children and pets. If they accidentallyswallow a battery, seek medical attention
immediately.
To prevent batteries from leaking,overheating, or causing a fire or explosion,use only batteries recommended for use withthis product.
If rechargeable batteries have not beenrecharged within the specified time, stop
charging them and do not use them.
Do not use batteries with scratches ordamage to the casing, and do not scratch
the battery.

9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS• Keep young children, infants away fromthe camera.
• Always use and store the camera out of
the reach of young children and infants toprevent the following dangerous situations
which could cause serious injury:• Becoming entangled in the camera
strap, causing strangulation.
• Accidentally swallowing the battery,cards or other small parts.
• Accidentally firing the flash into theirown eyes or those of another child.
• Accidentally being injured by themoving parts of the camera.
• Should you notice that the charger isemitting smoke, heat, or an unusual noiseor smell, immediately cease use andunplug the charger from the power outlet,
and then contact an authorized distributor
or service center.
• Stop using the camera immediately if
you notice any unusual odors, noise, orsmoke around it.
• Never remove the batteries with barehands, which may cause a fire or burnyour hands.
• Never hold or operate the camera with wet
hands.
This may cause overheating, exploding,burning, electrical shocks, or malfunctions.
• Do not leave the camera in places where
it may be subject to extremely hightemperatures.
• Doing so may cause parts to deteriorate
and, in some circumstances, cause
the camera to catch fire. Do not use
the charger if it is covered (such as a
blanket). This could cause overheating,resulting in fire.
• Handle the camera with care to avoid
getting a low temperature burn.
• When the camera contains metalparts, overheating can result in a lowtemperature burn. Pay attention to thefollowing:• When used for a long period, thecamera will get hot. If you hold on
to the camera in this state, a lowtemperature burn may be caused.
• In places subject to extremely cold
temperatures, the temperature of thecamera’s body may be lower than theenvironmental temperature. If possible,
wear gloves when handling the camera
in cold temperatures.
• To protect the high-precision technology
contained in this product, never leave thecamera in the places listed below, no matter if
in use or storage:

EN 181

• Never subject batteries to strong shocks orcontinuous vibration by dropping or hitting.
This may cause exploding, overheating, orburning.
• If a battery leaks, has unusual odor, becomes
discolored or deformed, or becomesabnormal in any other way during operation,
stop using the camera, and keep away fromfire immediately.
• If a battery leaks fluid onto your clothingor skin, remove the clothing and flush theaffected area with clean, running cold water
immediately. If the fluid burns your skin, seek
medical attention immediately.
• The Olympus lithium-ion battery is designed
to be used only for the Olympus digital
camera. Do not use the battery to otherdevices.
• Do not allow children or animals/pets tohandle or transport batteries (prevent
dangerous behaviour such as licking,putting in mouth or chewing).

Use Only Dedicated Rechargeable
Battery and Battery Charger

9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
182 EN

We strongly recommend that you use only thegenuine Olympus dedicated rechargeable battery
and battery charger with this camera.
Using a non-genuine rechargeable battery and/or battery charger may result in fire or personal
injury due to leakage, heating, ignition or damage
to the battery. Olympus does not assume any
liability for accidents or damage that may result
from the use of a battery and/or battery charger
that are not genuine Olympus accessories.

CAUTION• Do not cover the flash with a hand whilefiring.
• Never store batteries where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, or subjected tohigh temperatures in a hot vehicle, near aheat source, etc.
• Keep batteries dry at all times.
• The battery may become hot during
prolonged use. To avoid minor burns, do notremove it immediately after using the camera.
• This camera uses one Olympus lithium-ion
battery. Use the specified genuine battery.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with the incorrect battery type.
• Please recycle batteries to help save ourplanet’s resources. When you throw away
dead batteries, be sure to cover theirterminals and always observe local laws andregulations.

NOTICE• Do not use or store the camera in dusty or
humid places.
• Use SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards or
Eye-Fi cards only. Never use other typesof cards.
If you accidently insert another type of card
into the camera, contact an authorized
distributor or service center. Do not try to
remove the card by force.
• Regularly back up important data to acomputer or other storage device to prevent
accidental loss.
• OLYMPUS accepts no liability for any loss ofdata associated with this device.
• Be careful with the strap when you carry thecamera. It could easily catch on stray objects
and cause serious damage.
• Before transporting the camera, remove
a tripod and all other non-OLYMPUS
accessories.
• Never drop the camera or subject it to severe
shocks or vibrations.
• When attaching the camera to or removing
it from a tripod, rotate the tripod screw, notthe camera.
• Do not touch electric contacts on cameras.
• Do not leave the camera pointed directlyat the sun. This may cause lens or shutter
curtain damage, color failure, ghosting on
the image pickup device, or may possibly
cause fires.
• Do not leave the viewfinder exposed to astrong light source or direct sunlight. The
heat may damage the viewfinder.
• Do not push or pull severely on the lens.
• Be sure to remove any water droplets orother moisture from the product before
replacing the battery or opening or closing
covers.
• Before storing the camera for a long period,
remove the batteries. Select a cool, drylocation for storage to prevent condensation
or mold from forming inside the camera. Afterstorage, test the camera by turning it on andpressing the shutter button to make sure that
it is operating normally.
• The camera may malfunction if it is used ina location where it is subject to a magnetic/
electromagnetic field, radio waves, or highvoltage, such as near a TV set, microwave,
video game, loud speakers, large monitor
unit, TV/radio tower, or transmission towers.
In such cases, turn the camera off and on
again before further operation.
• Always observe the operating environment
restrictions described in the camera’s
manual.

Using the wireless LAN function• Turn off the camera in hospitals and otherlocations where medical equipment ispresent.
The radio waves from the camera may
adversely affect medical equipment, causing
a malfunction that results in an accident.
• Turn off the camera when onboard
aircraft.
Using wireless devices onboard may hinder
safe operation of the aircraft.

Monitor• A strip of light may appear on the top/bottomof the monitor, but this is not a malfunction.
• When a subject is viewed diagonally in thecamera, the edges may appear zigzagged on
the monitor. This is not a malfunction; it willbe less noticeable in playback mode.
• In places subject to low temperatures, themonitor may take a long time to turn on or its
color may change temporarily.
When using the camera in extremely cold
places, it is a good idea to occasionally place
it in a warm place. The monitor exhibiting
poor performance due to low temperatures
will recover in normal temperatures.
• The monitor of this product is manufactured
with high-quality accuracy, however, there
may be a stuck or dead pixel on the monitor.
These pixels do not have any influenceon the image to be saved. Because of thecharacteristics, the unevenness of the color
or brightness may also be found dependingon the angle, but this is due to the structureof the monitor. This is not a malfunction.

Legal and Other Notices• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages, or
benefit expected by using this unit lawfully,
or any request from a third person, which
are caused by the inappropriate use of thisproduct.
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages or any
benefit expected by using this unit lawfully
which are caused by erasing picture data.

Disclaimer of Warranty• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties, either expressed or implied, byor concerning any content of these writtenmaterials or software, and in no event
shall be liable for any implied warranty ofmerchantability or fitness for any particularpurpose or for any consequential, incidental
or indirect damages (including but not limited
to damages for loss of business profits,business interruption and loss of businessinformation) arising from the use or inability
to use these written materials or software
or equipment. Some countries do not allow
the exclusion or limitation of liability forconsequential or incidental damages or of
the implied warranty, so the above limitations
may not apply to you.
• Olympus reserves all rights to this manual.

9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS• Insert the battery carefully as described in theoperating instructions.
• Before loading, always inspect the battery
carefully for leaks, discoloration, warping, or
any other abnormality.
• Always unload the battery from the camera
before storing the camera for a long period.
• When storing the battery for a long period,
select a cool location for storage.
• Power consumption by the camera varies
depending on which functions are used.
• During the conditions described below, power
is consumed continuously and the battery
becomes exhausted quickly.
• The zoom is used repeatedly.
• The shutter button is pressed halfway
repeatedly in shooting mode, activating
the auto focus.
• A picture is displayed on the monitor foran extended period of time.
• The camera is connected to a printer.
• Using an exhausted battery may cause thecamera to turn off without displaying thebattery level warning.
• If the battery’s terminals get wet or greasy,camera contact failure may result. Wipe thebattery well with a dry cloth before use.
• Always charge a battery when using it for
the first time, or if it has not been used for along period.
• When operating the camera with battery
power at low temperatures, try to keep
the camera and spare battery as warm as
possible. A battery that has run down at
low temperatures may be restored after it iswarmed at room temperature.
• Before going on a long trip, and especiallybefore traveling abroad, purchase extra
batteries. A recommended battery may bedifficult to obtain while traveling.

• Do not push the monitor forcibly; otherwise
the image may become vague, resulting ina playback mode failure or damage to themonitor.

EN 183

Warning

FCC/IC Caution

Unauthorized photographing or use of
copyrighted material may violate applicable
copyright laws. Olympus assumes noresponsibility for unauthorized photographing,use or other acts that infringe upon the rights ofcopyright owners.

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliancecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or
operated in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.

Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of these writtenmaterials or this software may be reproduced
or used in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying andrecording or the use of any type of information
storage and retrieval system, without the priorwritten permission of Olympus. No liability
is assumed with respect to the use of theinformation contained in these written materials
or software, or for damages resulting fromthe use of the information contained therein.
Olympus reserves the right to alter the featuresand contents of this publication or software
without obligation or advance notice.

FCC Notice9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
184 EN

This equipment has been tested and foundto comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference ina residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used inaccordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off andon, the user is encouraged to try to correct theinterference by one or more of the following
measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on acircuit different from that to which the receiveris connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/
TV technician for help.
• Only the OLYMPUS-supplied USB cableshould be used to connect the camera to
USB enabled personal computers.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolledenvironment and meets the FCC radio frequency(RF) Exposure Guidelines. This equipment hasvery low levels of RF energy that are deemed
to comply without testing of specific absorption
rate (SAR).
The available scientific evidence does not showthat any health problems are associated withusing low power wireless devices. There is no
proof, however, that these low power wirelessdevices are absolutely safe. Low power Wirelessdevices emit low levels of radio frequency energy(RF) in the microwave range while being used.
Whereas high levels of RF can produce healtheffects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level
RF that does not produce heating effects causes
no known adverse health effects. Many studiesof low-level RF exposures have not found any
biological effects. Some studies have suggested
that some biological effects might occur, but suchfindings have not been confirmed by additional
research. IM002 has been tested and found tocomply with IC radiation exposure limits set forth
for an uncontrolled environment and meets RSS102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposurerules.

For customers in North America, Central America, South America
and the Caribbean
Declaration of Conformity
Model Number: IM002
Trade Name
: OLYMPUS
Responsible Party :Address: 3500 Corporate Parkway, P. O. Box 610, Center Valley, PA 18034-0610, USA
Telephone Number : 484-896-5000
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)repairs and (ii) make any internal or external
design and/or feature changes on or to its
products without any liability to incorporate suchchanges on or to the Products.
WHAT IS NOT COVERED BY THIS LIMITEDWARRANTY
Excluded from this limited warranty and not
warranted by Olympus in any fashion, either
express, implied, or by statute, are:(a) products and accessories not manufactured
by Olympus and/or not bearing the“OLYMPUS” brand label (the warranty
coverage for products and accessories
of other manufacturers, which may be
distributed by Olympus, is the responsibilityof the respective manufacturer of suchproducts and accessories in accordancewith the terms and duration of suchmanufacturers’ warranties);(b) any Product which has been disassembled,
repaired, tampered with, altered, changed,
or modified by persons other than Olympus’s
own authorized service personnel unlessrepair by others is made with the writtenconsent of Olympus;(c) defects or damage to the Products resulting
from wear, tear, misuse, abuse, negligence,
sand, liquids, impact, improper storage,
nonperformance of scheduled operator
and maintenance items, battery leakage,use of non-“OLYMPUS” brand accessories,
consumables, or supplies, or use of the
Products in combination with non-compatible
devices;(d) software programs;(e) supplies and consumables (including but
not limited to lamps, ink, paper, film, prints,
negatives, cables and batteries); and/or

9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONSOLYMPUS AMERICAS LIMITED WARRANTY OLYMPUS AMERICA INC. PRODUCTS
Olympus warrants that the enclosed Olympus®
imaging product(s) and related Olympus®
accessories (individually a “Product” andcollectively the “Products”) will be free fromdefects in materials and workmanship undernormal use and service for a period of one (1)year from the date of purchase.
If any Product proves to be defective within the
one-year warranty period, the customer must
return the defective Product to the authorized
Olympus Repair Service Center designatedby Olympus, following the procedure set forth
below (See “WHAT TO DO WHEN SERVICE IS
NEEDED”).
Olympus, at its sole discretion, will repair,
replace, or adjust the defective Product at
Olympus’s cost, provided that an Olympus
investigation and factory inspection disclose that(a) such defect developed under normal andproper use and (b) the Product is covered under
this limited warranty.
Repair, replacement, or adjustment of defective
Products shall be Olympus’s sole obligation andthe customer’s sole remedy hereunder. Repair
or replacement of a Product shall not extend thewarranty period provided herein, unless requiredby law.
Except where prohibited by law, the customer
is liable and shall pay for shipment of the
Products to the designated Olympus Repair
Service Center. Olympus shall not be obligatedto perform preventive maintenance, installation,
deinstallation, or maintenance.
Olympus reserves the right to (i) use
reconditioned, refurbished, and/or serviceable
used parts (that meet Olympus’s quality
assurance standards) for warranty or any otherEN 185(f) Products which do not contain a validly
placed and recorded Olympus serial number,unless they are a model on which Olympus
does not place and record serial numbers.
(g) Products shipped, delivered, purchased, orsold from dealers located outside of North
America, Central America, South America
and the Caribbean; and/or(h) Products that are not intended or authorized
to be sold in North America, South America,
Central America, or the Caribbean (ie. Gray
Market Goods).

9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
186 ENWARRANTY DISCLAIMER; LIMITATIONOF DAMAGES; AFFIRMATION OF ENTIREWARRANTY AGREEMENT; INTENDED
BENEFICIALLY
EXCEPT FOR THE LIMITED WARRANTY SETFORTH ABOVE, OLYMPUS MAKES NO ANDDISCLAIMS ALL OTHER REPRESENTATIONS,GUARANTIES, CONDITIONS, AND
WARRANTIES CONCERNING THE
PRODUCTS, WHETHER DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OR
ARISING UNDER ANY STATUTE, ORDINANCE,COMMERCIAL USAGE OR OTHERWISE,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANYWARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION AS TO
THE SUITABILITY, DURABILITY, DESIGN,OPERATION, OR CONDITION OF THE
PRODUCTS (OR ANY PART THEREOF)
OR THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE
PRODUCTS OR THEIR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR RELATING
TO THE INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT,COPYRIGHT, OR OTHER PROPRIETARYRIGHT USED OR INCLUDED THEREIN.
IF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES APPLY AS
A MATTER OF LAW, THEY ARE LIMITED IN
DURATION TO THE LENGTH OF THIS LIMITEDWARRANTY.
SOME STATES MAY NOT RECOGNIZEA DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF
WARRANTIES AND/OR LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMERS AND
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY.
THE CUSTOMER MAY ALSO HAVEDIFFERENT AND/OR ADDITIONAL RIGHTSAND REMEDIES THAT VARY FROM STATETO STATE.
THE CUSTOMER ACKNOWLEDGES AND
AGREES THAT OLYMPUS SHALL NOT BERESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES THAT
THE CUSTOMER MAY INCUR FROM DELAYEDSHIPMENT, PRODUCT FAILURE, PRODUCTDESIGN, SELECTION, OR PRODUCTION,
IMAGE OR DATA LOSS OR IMPAIRMENTOR FROM ANY OTHER CAUSE, WHETHER
LIABILITY IS ASSERTED IN CONTRACT, TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICTPRODUCT LIABILITY) OR OTHERWISE. IN NO
EVENT SHALL OLYMPUS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR SPECIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND(INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSSOF PROFITS OR LOSS OF USE), WHETHEROR NOT OLYMPUS SHALL BE OR SHOULD
BE AWARE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCHPOTENTIAL LOSS OR DAMAGE.
Representations and warranties made by any
person, including but not limited to dealers,
representatives, salespersons, or agents ofOlympus, which are inconsistent or in conflictwith or in addition to the terms of this limited
warranty, shall not be binding upon Olympus
unless reduced to writing and approved by an
expressly authorized officer of Olympus.
This limited warranty is the complete andexclusive statement of warranty which
Olympus agrees to provide with respect to the
Products and it shall supersede all prior andcontemporaneous oral or written agreements,
understandings, proposals, and communications
pertaining to the subject matter hereof.
This limited warranty is exclusively for the
benefit of the original customer and cannot betransferred or assigned.
WHAT TO DO WHEN SERVICE IS NEEDEDThe customer must contact the designatedOlympus Consumer Support Team for yourregion to coordinate the submission of your
Product for repair service. To contact your
Olympus Consumer Support Team in your region
please visit or call the following:
Canada:www.olympuscanada.com/repair /1-800-622-6372
United States:
www.olympusamerica.com/repair /1-800-622-6372
Latin America:
www.olympusamericalatina.com
The customer must copy or transfer any image orother data saved on a Product to another image
or data storage medium prior to sending the
Product to Olympus for for repair service.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OLYMPUS BERESPONSIBLE FOR SAVING, KEEPING OR
MAINTAINING ANY IMAGE OR DATA SAVED
ON A PRODUCT RECEIVED BY IT FORSERVICE, OR ON ANY FILM CONTAINEDWITHIN A PRODUCT RECEIVED BY IT
FOR SERVICE, NOR SHALL OLYMPUS BERESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES IN
THE EVENT ANY IMAGE OR DATA IS LOST
OR IMPAIRED WHILE SERVICE IS BEINGPERFORMED (INCLUDING, WITHOUT

LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES,LOSS OF PROFITS OR LOSS OF USE),
WHETHER OR NOT OLYMPUS SHALL BE OR
SHOULD BE AWARE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH POTENTIAL LOSS OR IMPAIRMENT.

PRIVACY
Any information provided by you to process yourwarranty claim shall be kept confidential andwill only be used and disclosed for the purposesof processing and performing warranty repair
services.

Simple Declaration of Comformity
Hereby, OLYMPUS CORPORATION declares thatthe radio equipment type IM002 is in compliancewith Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity isavailable at the following internet address:
http://www.olympus-europa.com/
This symbol [crossed-out
wheeled bin WEEE Annex IV]
indicates separate collection ofwaste electrical and electronicequipment in the EU countries.
Please do not throw theequipment into the domestic
refuse.
Please use the return andcollection systems available inyour country for the disposal ofthis product.
This symbol [crossed-out wheeledbin Directive 2006/66/EC Annex
II] indicates separate collectionof waste batteries in the EU
countries.
Please do not throw the batteries
into the domestic refuse.
Please use the return andcollection systems available inyour country for the disposal of
the waste batteries.

9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The customer should package the Productcarefully using ample padding material to prevent
damage in transit. Once the Product is properly
packaged, ship the package to Olympus or the
Olympus Authorized Repair Service Center
location as instructed by the respective Olympus
Consumer Support Team.
When sending Products for repair service, yourpackage should include the following:1) Sales receipt showing date and place ofpurchase. Handwritten receipts will not be
accepted;2) Copy of this limited warranty bearing the
Product serial number corresponding to
the serial number on the Product (unless it
is a model on which Olympus does not place
and record serial numbers);
3) A detailed description of the problem; and
4) Sample prints, negatives, digital prints (orfiles on disk) if available and related to the
problem.
KEEP COPIES OF ALL DOCUMENTS. Neither
Olympus nor an Olympus Authorized Repair
Service Center will be responsible for documentsthat are lost or destroyed in transit.
When service is completed, the Product will be
returned to you postage prepaid.

For customers in Europe

EN 187

9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
188 EN

Provisions of warranty
In the unlikely event that your product proves
to be defective, although it has been usedproperly (in accordance with the written
Instruction Manual supplied with it), during theapplicable national warranty period and has
been purchased from an authorized Olympus
distributor within the business area of OLYMPUS
EUROPA SE & Co. KG as stipulated on thewebsite: http://www.olympus-europa.com, it will
be repaired, or at Olympus’s option replaced,free of charge. In order to enable Olympus toprovide you with the requested warranty services
to your full satisfaction and as fast as possible,
please note the information and instructions
listed below:
1. To claim under this warranty please follow
the instructions on http://consumer-service.
olympus-europa.com for registration andtracking (this service is not available inall countries) or take the product, thecorresponding original invoice or purchasereceipt and the completed Warranty
Certificate to the dealer where it waspurchased or any other Olympus service
station within the business area of OLYMPUS
EUROPA SE & Co. KG as stipulated on thewebsite: http://www.olympus-europa.com,
before the end of the applicable national
warranty period.
2. Please make sure your Warranty Certificate isduly completed by Olympus or an authorized
dealer or Service center. Therefore, please
make sure that your name, the name of thedealer, the serial number and the year, monthand date of purchase are all completed or theoriginal invoice or the sales receipt (indicating
the dealer’s name, the date of purchase andproduct type) is attached to your Warranty
Certificate.
3. Since this Warranty Certificate will not be
re-issued, keep it in a safe place.
4. Please note that Olympus will not assume
any risks or bear any costs incurred intransporting the product to the dealer or
Olympus authorized service station.
5. This Warranty does not cover the following
and you will be required to pay a repair
charge, even for defects occurring within thewarranty period referred to above.
a. Any defect that occurs due to mishandling(such as an operation performed that is
not mentioned in the Instruction Manual,etc.)b. Any defect that occurs due to repair,modification, cleaning, etc. performedby anyone other than Olympus or an
Olympus authorized service station.

c. Any defect or damage that occurs due totransport, a fall, shock, etc. after purchaseof the product.
d. Any defect or damage that occurs due
to fire, earthquake, flood damage,thunderbolt, other natural disasters,
environmental pollution and irregularvoltage sources.
e. Any defect that occurs due to carelessor improper storage (such as keeping
the product under conditions of hightemperature and humidity, near insect
repellents such as naphthalene or harmful
drugs, etc.), improper maintenance, etc.
f. Any defect that occurs due to exhausted
batteries, etc.
g. Any defect that occurs due to sand,mud, water etc. entering the inside of the
product casing.
6. Olympus’s sole liability under this Warranty
shall be limited to repairing or replacing the
product. Any liability under the Warranty forindirect or consequential loss or damage ofany kind incurred or suffered by the customer
due to a defect of the product, and inparticular any loss or damage caused to any
lenses, films, other equipment or accessories
used with the product or for any loss resulting
from a delay in repair or loss of data, is
excluded. Compelling regulations by law
remain unaffected by this.

For customers in Thailand
This telecommunication equipment is incompliance with NTC requirements.

For customers in Mexico
The operation of this equipment is subject to thefollowing two conditions:(1) it is possible that this equipment or device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)this equipment or device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

For customer in Singapore

Trademarks

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE
OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO INCOMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THATWAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED
IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIALACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDEAVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR
SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINEDFROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.
MPEGLA.COM

The software in this camera may include third
party software. Any third party software is subject
to the terms and conditions, imposed by theowners or licensors of that software, under whichsoftware is provided to you.
Those terms and other third party software
notices, if any, may be found in the software
notice PDF file stored at
http://www.olympus.co.jp/en/support/imsg/
digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm

9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS• Microsoft and Windows are registeredtrademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Inc.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• Eye-Fi is a trademark of Eye-Fi,
Inc.
• “Shadow Adjustment
Technology” function contains
patented technologies from
Apical Limited.
• Micro Four Thirds, Four Thirds,
and the Micro Four Thirds andFour Thirds logos are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of the OLYMPUS CORPORATION
in Japan, the United States, the countries of
the European Union, and other countries.
• Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
• The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED
logo is a certification markof the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• The standards for camera
file systems referred to in this manual are the“Design Rule for Camera File System/DCF”
standards stipulated by the Japan Electronics
and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
• All other company and product names areregistered trademarks and/or trademarks of
their respective owners.

EN 18910Additions/modifications by firmware
update

The following functions are added/modified by firmware update.

Additions/modifications by firmware update10

190 EN

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 2.0

g

Information displays while shooting

192

Pro Capture shooting (buffering capacity increased)

192

Pro Capture shooting (supported lens added)

192

Types of art filters ([Bleach Bypass] added)

193

AF target mode ([Small Target] added)

193

q U Default Setting

193

Flicker Scan

194

Fisheye Compensation

194

Button Function[Flicker Scan], [Fisheye Compensation] added

195

Default settings

195

Setting to restrict flash firing during focus bracketing (P.94) discontinued―

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 3.0g

Viewfinder and Monitor Displays

196

Types of art filters ([Instant Film] added)

196

AF target mode ([25-Target Group] added)

196

Exposure compensation in the manual mode

196

Program shift for shooting underwater

197

ISO

197

WB Compensation

197

WKeep Warm Color

197

nPicture Mode197

Selecting Multiple Pictures

198

Focus Stacking

198

nDisplay Settings ([aView Assist] added)

198

KAF+MF199

KAF Mode ([C-AFb] and [C-AF+TRb] added)

199

Cluster AF targeting

199

KC-AF Center Start

200

KC-AF Center Priority

200

Anti-Flicker Shooting

201

Live View Boost

201

KLow ISO Processing

202

Frame-by-frame playback of still images

202

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 3.0

g
202

Operations during RAW data editing in Olympus Workspace

202

Menu directory (nVideo Menu and GCustom Menu modified)

203

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 3.2g

EVF Auto Switch

212

Additions/modifications by firmware update

Operations while writing to a card10

EN 191

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 2.0
Information displays while shooting
Additions/modifications by firmware update

10

Monitor display during still photography
The battery level icon has been modified.
Icon displays for Pro Capture shooting, Flicker Scan, and Fisheye Compensation
shooting have been added.

%

1 Battery level display
2 Pro Capture shooting .....................P.192

3 Fisheye Compensation shooting ...P.194
4 Flicker Scan ...................................P.194

Pro Capture shooting (buffering capacity increased)[Pre-shutter Frames] in Pro Capture shooting (P.48) has been extended to up to 35
frames.
[Pre-shutter Frames] can be set in [0] of [j L Settings] or [j H Settings] (P. 114)
in Custom Menu.

Pro Capture shooting (supported lenses added)
Lenses that support Pro Capture shooting (P.48) have been added.
See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses that can be used with Pro
Capture shooting.

192 EN

Types of art filters ([Bleach Bypass] added)[Bleach Bypass] is added to the art filters (P. 33).
The “bleach bypass” effect, which you may recognize from motion
pictures and the like, can be used to great effect in shots ofstreetscapes or metal objects.

“II” is an alternate version of the original (I).

AF target mode ([Small Target] added)[Small Target] is added to the AF target mode (P. 39).

i

i

o

i

i

i

o (All Targets)

The camera automatically chooses from the full set of
focus targets.

I (Single Target)

You can choose a single AF target.

K (Small Target)

The AF target can be reduced in size.

n (5-Target Group)

The camera automatically chooses from the targets inthe selected five-target group.

J (9-Target Group)

The camera automatically chooses from the targets inthe selected nine-target group.

Additions/modifications by firmware update

Bleach Bypass
I/II

10

q U Default Setting
A zoom ratio setting for close-up image playback (P.79) has been added.
The following option is added in the custom menus (MENUG
Q) (P.115).
OptionqU
Default Setting

Description
Choose the zoom ratio from [Recently], [Equally Value], [×2], [×3],[×5], [×7], [×10] or [×14].
is displayed on the monitor.
When [Equally Value] is selected,

EN 193

Flicker Scan

Additions/modifications by firmware update

10This function lets you shoot images with less flicker from indoor LED lamps, bychanging the shutter speed incrementally while you check the degree of flicker on the
live-view display.
While Flicker Scan is activated, if you want to use shooting functions such as aperture
adjustment or exposure compensation, press the INFO button to switch to anothersetting screen.
To return to the Flicker Scan screen, press the INFO button repeatedly until the screen
switches.
• Using Zoom AF display (P.41) makes the degree of flicker easier to assess.
• The range of shutter speeds that can be set is smaller when Flicker Scan is activated.
During still image shooting

The following option is added in the custom menus (MENUGU) (P.118).
Flicker Scan is available during Silent [♥] shooting, Pro Capture shooting, or High Res
Shot when the mode dial is set to S or M.
Optionz Flicker Scan

Description
Set the option to [On], and use the front dial (r)/rear dial (o) or
FG on the arrow pad to adjust the shutter speed until flicker isreduced.

During movie recording

The following option is added in Video Menu (MENUnn Mode Settings)(P.100).
Flicker Scan is available when the mode dial is set to n, and n Mode is set to S or
M.
Optionn Flicker Scan

Description
Set the option to [On], and use the front dial (r)/rear dial (o) or
FG on the arrow pad to adjust the shutter speed until flicker isreduced.

Fisheye Compensation
This function compensates for the distortion from a fisheye lens, allowing you to shootimages resembling those taken with a super-wide-angle lens.
This function can only be set when you attach a supported fisheye lens*1.
The following option is added in the custom menus (MENUGb) (P.122).
OptionFisheye
Compensation

Description
Set the option to [On], and press I on the arrow pad to set thedetailed options. The angle (1 to 3), and [On]/[Off] for IH
Correction can be set.

*1 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 8mm f1.8 Fisheye PRO supports this function (as of the end of
February 2018).

194 ENButton Function
During still image shooting

OptionG

ButtonM

Description

Flicker Scan

Press the button to activate Flicker Scan. To deactivate the function,press and hold down the button. Use the front dial (r)/rear dial (o)or FG on the arrow pad to adjust the shutter speed.
When [On] is selected, press the button again to switch theinformation display.
• Flicker Scan is available during Silent [♥] shooting, Pro Capture
shooting, or High Res Shot when the mode dial is set to S or M.

Fisheye
Compensation

Press the button to activate Fisheye Compensation. Press the button
again to cancel Fisheye Compensation.
Use the front dial (r) or rear dial (o) while holding down the button
to select the compensation level.

During movie recording

The following option is added in Video Menu (MENUn Button Function) (P.100).
OptionFlicker Scannn Button/Dial/Lever

Description
Press the button to activate Flicker Scan. To deactivate the function,press and hold down the button. Use the front dial (r)/rear dial (o)or FG on the arrow pad to adjust the shutter speed.
When [On] is selected, press the button again to switch theinformation display.
• Flicker Scan is available when the mode dial is set to n, and n
Mode is set to S or M.

Additions/modifications by firmware update

The following options are added in the custom menus (MENU
Function) (P.66).

10

Default settings
The default settings for new functions and the modified default settings are as follows.

*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].
n Video Menu
Tabnn ModeSettings

Functionn Moden Flicker ScanP
OffDefault

Functionq U Default Settingz Flicker Scan

Default
Recently
Off

*1

*2

*3








*1

*2

*3









g
102
194

G Custom Menu
Tab
G

Q
U

g
193
194

EN 195

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 3.0
Viewfinder and Monitor Displays
Additions/modifications by firmware update

10

Even while the monitor is in the open position, the camera uses the eye sensor toautomatically switch between the monitor and viewfinder displays.

Types of art filters ([Instant Film] added)[Instant Film] has been added to the art filters (P.33).
Instant Film

A contemporary take on the shadow and skin tones typical of film.

[Instant Film] has also been added to the picture modes (P.61) and ART BKT(P.93).

AF target mode ([25-Target Group] added)[25-Target Group] has been added to the AF target mode (P.39).

q

M

o

s

r

n

q (All Targets)

The camera automatically chooses from the full set of
focus targets.

I (Single Target)

You can choose a single AF target.

K (Small Target)

The AF target can be reduced in size.

n (5-Target Group)

The camera automatically chooses from the targets inthe selected five-target group.

r (9-Target Group)

The camera automatically chooses from the targets inthe selected nine-target group.

s (25-Target Group)

The camera automatically chooses from the targets
in the selected twenty-five-target group.

Exposure compensation in the manual mode
Exposure compensation adjustment using the exposure (F) button has been enabledin the manual mode.
To adjust the exposure compensation using the exposure (F) button, you must firstassign [F] to a button using Button Function (P.66).
To adjust the exposure compensation with the button, select [ALL] for [ISO-Auto](P.117) and [AUTO] for [ISO] (P.42, 51).
Use the front dial (r) or rear dial (o) while holding down the button to select acompensation value.

196 EN

Program shift for shooting underwaterISO
For ISO sensitivity for still images (P.42, 51), [L100] and [L64] have been added
as LOW options.

L64, L100,
200–25600

Choose a value for ISO sensitivity. ISO 200 offers a good balance between
noise and dynamic range. Choose [L100] or [L64] for larger apertures(higher f-numbers) or slower shutter speeds. [L64] is equivalent to ISO 64,[L100] to ISO 100.
• [L64] and [L100] are available at all exposure step values.
• [L64] and [L100] reduce dynamic range.

WB Compensation
When [CWB] (Custom white balance) is selected for WB (P.42, 52), WB
Compensation (P.52) has been enabled.

W Keep Warm Color

Additions/modifications by firmware update

Program shift setting using the I/H (Underwater wide/Underwater macro) button
has been enabled.
To use the I/H (Underwater wide/Underwater macro) button, you must first assign[I/H] (Underwater wide/Underwater macro) to a button using Button Function(P.66).
Use the rear dial (o) while shooting underwater. “s” will be displayed next to I/H
on the display.
To cancel the program shift, rotate the dial in the opposite direction until “s” is nolonger displayed.

10

W Keep Warm Color setting using the INFO button
has been enabled when WB is set to [AUTO], as well as
in the custom menus (MENUGX
W KeepWarm Color).

[WB] optionsn Picture Mode[l OM-Log400] has been added to picture modes exclusively for movie recording.
Priority is given to dynamic range for a tone curve suitable for color grading and otherpost-processing operations. These options are available for [Picture Mode] (P.61)
when [On] is selected for [n Picture Mode] (P.100).
k FlatMovies are recorded using a tone curve adapted to color grading.

l OM-Log400

Movies are recorded using a log tone curve for greater freedom duringcolor grading.

• [Sharpness], [Contrast], [Saturation], and [Gradation] options are unavailable.
• [n ISO] is restricted to values of ISO 400 or above.
• LUT files are available for editing movies recorded using movie-only picture modes. Visit
the OLYMPUS website for details.

EN 197

Selecting Multiple Pictures
Selection of multiple pictures for protection has been enabled.

Additions/modifications by firmware update

10• When an unmarked image is displayed, you can hold the R button (H button) and rotate
the front or rear dial to select all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any previouslymarked images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.
• When a marked image is displayed, you can hold the R button (H button) and rotate thefront or rear dial to deselect all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any previouslyunmarked images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.
• Perform the same operations using the AEL/AFL button (0 button) to protect the
pictures.
• The same operations can be performed during playback zoom or when a picture isselected in the index display.

Focus Stacking
A setting has been added that allows you to choose from
3 to 15 of shots for Focus Stacking (P.94).
A frame indicating the final crop will be shown on thedisplay. Compose the shot with your subject inside theframe.

BKT

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023

n Display Settings ([a View Assist] added)[a View Assist] has been added to the Video Menu (MENUnn Display
Settings).
The display can be adjusted for ease of viewing when a movie-only picture mode
option ([k Flat] or [l OM-Log400]) is selected.
Optiona View Assist

Description[On]: Adjust the picture for ease of viewing. The indicators in thedisplay may change color.
[Off]: Do not adjust the picture for ease of viewing.

• This option applies only to the display, not to the actual movie files.
• This option does not apply when movies recorded using [k Flat] or [l OM-Log400]
are played back on the camera. It also does not apply when the movies are viewed on aTV.

198 ENKAF+MF

Option

KAF+MF

Description[On]: Enable manual focus adjustment in autofocus mode. b isdisplayed next to [S-AF], [C-AF], or [C-AF+TR].
[Off]: Manual focus adjustment disabled during autofocus.

• The default setting is [Off]. To display [S-AFb], [C-AFb], or [C-AF+TRb], select[On].
• Autofocus with manual focus is also available when autofocus is assigned to other camera
controls. g [AEL/AFL] (P.123)• When [BULB], [LIVE TIME], or [LIVECOMP] is selected, manual focusing during exposure
operates according to the [Bulb/Time Focusing] setting.
• The lens focus ring can be used to interrupt autofocus only when M.ZUIKO PRO (Micro
Four Thirds PRO) lenses or M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-200mm F3.5-6.3 are used. For
information on other lenses, visit the OLYMPUS website.

KAF Mode ([C-AFb] and [C-AF+TRb] added)[C-AFb] and [C-AF+TRb] have been added to [K AF Mode] (P.43)
Manual focus adjustment is enabled. Manual focus is available when [On] is selected
for [KAF+MF] in G Custom Menu J (P.199).
C-AFb/CAF+TRb(Simultaneous useof C-AF mode and
MF mode)You can switch to manual focus while the camera is focusing incontinuous AF and continuous tracking AF modes. Press the shutter
button halfway a second time to refocus using autofocus. Focus canalso be adjusted manually while the shutter is open and during burst
photography in [Sequential Low] mode.

Additions/modifications by firmware update[KAF+MF] has been added to the Custom Menu (MENUGJ).
Set whether to enable or disable manual focusing in the auto focusing mode. When[On] is selected, you can switch from auto to manual focusing at will, or fine-tune thefocus manually using the lens focus ring after auto focusing.

10

Cluster AF targeting
Cluster AF targeting has been enabled when [S-AF] is chosen for [K AF Mode].
To enable cluster AF targeting when q (all targets) is
selected and [S-AF], [S-AFb], [C-AF], or [C-AFb] ischosen for [K AF Mode] (P.43), select [On2] for [AFArea Pointer] (P.111). The camera will display AF targets
for all areas that are in focus.

EN 199KC-AF Center Start[KC-AF Center Start] has been added to the Custom Menu (MENU

Additions/modifications by firmware update

10200 EN

G

J).

OptionDescription

KC-AF Center
Start

When used in combination with an AF-target mode other than single
target, [C-AF], [C-AF+TR], [C-AFb] and [C-AF+TRb] focus on
the center of the selected group only during the initial scan. Duringlater scans, the camera will focus using the surrounding targets.
Combining this option with an AF-target mode that covers a wide
area makes it easier to focus on erratically-moving subjects.

• Center start is enabled in modes indicated by a v.
• Center start does not take effect when [K C-AF Center Priority] (P.200) is enabled.

KC-AF Center Priority[KC-AF Center Priority] has been added to the Custom Menu (MENU

G

J).

OptionDescription

KC-AF Center
Priority

When focusing using group-target AF in [C-AF] and [C-AFb]modes, the camera always assigns priority to the center target in theselected group for a repeated series of focus operations. Only if thecamera is unable to focus using the center focus target will it focus
using the surrounding targets in the selected focus group. This helps
you track subjects that are moving quickly but relatively predictably.
Center priority is recommended in most situations.

• Center priority is enabled in modes indicated by a v.

Anti-Flicker Shooting[Anti-Flicker Shooting] in the Custom Menu has been moved from Q to N (MENUGN).
The following options have been modified or added.
Description[Anti-Flicker LV]: Reduce flicker under fluorescent lighting and thelike. Choose this option if flicker makes the display
difficult to view.
[Anti-Flicker Shooting]: You may notice uneven exposure in photos
taken under flickering light. When this option
is enabled, the camera will detect the flicker
frequency and adjust the timing of the shutter
release accordingly. This feature applies tophotos taken with the mechanical shutter.
• A u icon appears in the display
when [On] is selected.

u iconFLK

S-IS AUTO

ISO-A
200

YF
4K

30p

P

250 F5.6 0.0

1:02:031023• This option does not take effect in modes that use the electronic
shutter, including silent modes, High Res Shot, and Pro Capturemodes.
• The camera may be unable to detect flicker at some settings.
Normal release timing will be used if flicker is not detected.
• Normal release timing is used at slow shutter speeds.
• Enabling flicker reduction may cause release lag, slowing the frame
advance rate during burst photography

Additions/modifications by firmware update

OptionFlicker Reduction

10

Live View Boost
When [Live View Boost] in the Custom Menu (MENU
can choose [Frame Rate Priority] or [Quality Priority].

GQ) is set to [On2], you

Frame Rate
Priority

Frame rate has priority.
Colors may be slightly off, or the image quality may drop.

Quality Priority

Image quality has priority.
The displayed frame rate will drop when lighting is poor.

EN 201KLow ISO Processing[KLow ISO Processing] has been added to the Custom Menu (MENUG
T).
Choose the type of processing applied to photographs taken at low ISO sensitivities.

Additions/modifications by firmware update10

202 EN

OptionKLow ISO
Processing

Description[Drive Priority]: Image processing is adapted so as not to curtail thenumber of pictures that can be taken in a single burst.
[Detail Priority]: Image processing prioritizes image quality.

Frame-by-frame playback of still images
When [KSave Settings] (P.54) is set to [Auto Switch], the camera automaticallyswitches between the last photo on the first memory card and the first photo on thesecond card.

Operations while writing to a card
Playback and setting changes have been enabled while writing to a card.

Operations during RAW data editing in Olympus Workspace
When editing RAW data in the Olympus Workspace (Ver. 1.1 or later), high-speed
processing using the camera engine has been enabled.
When you connect the USB cable to the camera, select [aPC RAW] on the destination
selection screen.

Menu directory*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].

n Video Menu
Tabnn ModeSettings

Functionn Moden Flicker ScannKn Specificationn Noise Filter
Settings
n Picture Moden AF/ISn AF Mode
Settings
n Image Stabilizer

Default
P
Off
MOVn4K
30p
Normal
Off
C-AF

*1

*2

*3
























M-IS1









g
102
194
102
43,
51,
53,
100

n Button/Dial/LeverU Function
V Function
R Function
t Function
Y Function
Z Function
u Function
u Function
n ButtonFunction

8 Function
u Function
m Functionn Function
v Function
w Function
x Functionl Function

AF Area
SelectMulti
FunctionR REC
AEL/AFL
PeakingUuDirectFunction
Electronic
Zoom
kISO/
jWB
AF Area
Select
AEL/AFL
DirectFunction
Electronic
Zoom
kISO/
jWB
AF Stop









Additions/modifications by firmware update

The menu directory has been changed as follows due to additional functions.

10




100









EN 203

Tab

FunctionnP

Additions/modifications by firmware update

10n DialFunctionAS
M

n Fn Lever Functionn Shutter Functionn Elec. Zoom Speedn Display Settingsn Control Settingsn Info Settings

Time Code
Settings

Time Code Mode

Count Up
Starting Time
8 Display Patterna View Assist
Movie K
Built-in K
RecordingVolumeMIC K
K Volume Limiter
Wind Noise Reduction
K Plug-in Power
Camera Rec. Volume
PCM
Recorder K Slate Tone
Link
Synchronized R Rec.
Headphone Volume
n HDMI
Output204 EN

Output ModeREC BitTime CodeDefault
ExposureF/
ExposureF
Exposure
F/FNo.
Exposure
F/Shutter
FNo./
Shutter
mode1w
NormalLive
Control,
Live SCP
Custom1/
Custom2(all onexceptfor Movie
Effect)Drop
Frame
Rec Run0:00:00
min
Off
On
±0
±0
On
Off
Off
Operative
OffOff
8
Monitor
Mode
Off
On

*1

*2

*3

g





100











101







198























103








101

G Custom Menu
Tab

Function

Default*1 *2 *3

G AF/MF
J

KAF+MF
AEL/AFL

S-AF
C-AF
MF

AF Scanner
C-AF Lock
KC-AF Center Start
KC-AF Center Priority
K N Mode Settings*
AF Area Pointer
AF Targeting Pad
N Set Home
N Custom Settingskj
A
B
L AF Limiter
Distancesettings
Pri. Rls
AF Illuminator
IFace Priority
AF Focus Adj.
I Preset MF distance
Magnify
MF Assist
Peaking
MF Clutch
Focus Ring
Bulb/Time Focusing
Reset Lens

S-AF







Off
mode1
mode2
mode1
mode2
±0
q (All Targets)
5, 9, or 25 targets
All OnOn1
Off
AF Target Mode, AF Target
Point
Set 1
NMode
I
6Pos
6Pos
Off










































































Setting 1







On
On













K





Off
999.9 mOff
Off
Operative
b
On
On













































43,
51,
111,
199
199
111,
123
111
200
111

112

111

Additions/modifications by firmware update

KAF mode

g

10

112
40,
112
112
112
112,
124

112

* The function name “5 Settings” has been changed to “N Mode Settings.”

EN 205Tab

Function

Default*1 *2 *3

g





66,
113













G Button/Dial/Lever
M

Additions/modifications by firmware update10

206 ENK ButtonFunction

U Function
V Function
R Function
t Function
Y Function
Z Function
u Function
u Function
8 Function
u Function
m Functionn Function
v Function
w Function
x Functionl Function

9 LockK DialFunction

P
A
S
M
Menu
q

Exposure
Dial DirectionPs
K Fn Lever
K Fn Lever Function
Settings
Switch v
Function
Fn Lever/Power LeverK Elec. Zoom Speed

AF Area SelectMulti Function
R REC
AEL/AFL
k
z
u
N
#
j/Y
AF Area Select
AEL/AFLN#j/Y
AF Stop
Off
Exposure F, Ps
Exposure F, FNo.
Exposure F, Shutter
FNo., Shutter
HI, FG/Value

113

GU, Prev/Next
Dial1
Dial1
mode1



Off



Fn
Normal






113,
124
113

*1 *2 *3

g

Off
On










114

10fps







Off







18fps







Off







18fps







8 shots

On, 25 shots







Max fps
15fps
Frame Count
Off
Limiter
Max fps
60fps♥jFrame Count
Off
Limiter
Max fps
60fps
Pre-shutter
14 shots
Frames0
Frame CountOn, 25 shots
LimiterFlicker
Anti-Flicker LV Auto
reduction
Anti-Flicker
Off
Shooting
O K Image Stabilizer
S-IS AUTO















































j Image Stabilization
Half Way Rls With IS
Lens I.S. Priority
Disp/8/PC
iAUTO
PK Control
P/A/S/M
Settings
ART
q InfoqU Info
G/InfoSettings
LV-InfoTab

Function

Default

G Release/j/Image Stabilizer

j/♦j

♥j

0

Max fpsFrame Count
Limiter
Max fpsFrame Count
Limiter
Max fpsPre-shutter
FramesFrame Count
Limiter114

jH Settingsj

G Settings
Picture Mode Settings
j/Y Settings
Multi Function Settings

10
201











Fps Priority
On
Off









Live Guide
Live SCPArt Menu
Image Only, Overall
All OnImage Only, Custom1 (u),Custom2 (Level Gauge)
25, My Clips, Calendar
All On♥o, S, T, ♥S, ♥T,p, q, h, YC, Y12s
On for settings except f
































114

Additions/modifications by firmware update

N Rls Priority S
Rls Priority C
jL Settings

53,
114
114

115,
125


115,
127

115

EN 207

Tab

Function
Default
ManualOn1
Shooting
Bulb/Time
On2
Live View
Boost
Live
Off
Composite
OthersOff
Art LV Mode
mode1
Frame Rate
Normal
LV Close Up
mode2
LV Close Up Mode
Settings
Live View
Off
Boost
Recentlyq U Default SettingOffz Lockz Settings
Live View
Off
Boost
Display Color Preset 1
R
Displayed Grid Off
Grid Settings
Apply SettingsOn
to EVF
Peaking Color Red
Highlight
NormalPeaking
Intensity
Settings
Image
Brightness
Off
Adj.
Highlight
255
Histogram
Settings
Shadow0Mode GuideOff*1 *2 *3g

G Q

Additions/modifications by firmware update

10

Selfie Assist
S 8
HDMI
USB Mode
Exp/ISO/BULB/p
T EV Step
ISO Step

















































On
Output Size
1080p
HDMI Control Off
Output Frame
60p Priority
Rate
Auto

115,
201

116



On

Upper Limit /Default
ISO-Auto Set
Lowest S/S
Setting
ISO-Auto
K Noise Filter
K Low ISO Processing
Noise Reduct.

208 EN



193
116

116
















116,
129
117
117,
130

1/3EV
1/3EV
High Limit: 6400 Default:
200
















Auto







All
Standard
Drive Priority
Auto















117

117

118
202
118

*1 *2 *3gBulb/Time Monitor
Live Bulb
Live Time

8min
-7
Off
0.5 sec











118

Composite Settings

1 sec





z Flicker Scan

Off







p







Auto
On
On
On
















±0





# CustomW #X-Sync.
#Slow Limit

1/250
1/60













w+F

Off







#+WB
K/WB/Color

W

































Tab

FunctionG U Bulb/Time Timer

AEL Metering
N SpotMetering
Exposure
Shift

Spot
Spot Highlight
Spot ShadowpJ
5

XiddlePixel Count
Wmall
Shading Comp.

K1 YF, K2 YN, K3
XN, K4 WN
3200×2400
1280×960
Off

WB

Auto

X K SetAll x

All SetAll Reset

A±0, G±0
―
―



30,
118
194
45,
51,
118
118

117

118,
131
39,
60,
118
119

119,
131

Additions/modifications by firmware update

V Metering

Default

10

119
42,
52,
119
119

W Keep Warm Color

On







Color Space

sRGB







119,
197
65,
119

EN 209Tab

Function

G Record/Erase
Y

Additions/modifications by firmware update

10

Card Slot
Settings

File Name
Edit Filename
dpi Settings
Copyright
Settings

K SaveSettings
K Save Slotn Save Slotq SlotAssign Save
FolderDefault
Standard





5
5
5













Do not assign





Reset

















―
350dpi
Copyright Info. Off
Artist Name
Copyright
Name

Lens Info Settings*
Z Quick Erase
RAW+JPEG Erase
Priority Set
EVF
a EVF Auto Switch
EVF Auto
Luminance
EVF Adjust
EVF Adjust
EVF Style*1 *2 *3

120
















121




121



j ±0, k ±0
Style 3

121,
133





121





* [Reset] (Full) and [Reset] (Basic) do not reset the info for individual lenses.

210 EN

120,
132



Basic Information, Custom1(u), Custom2 (level gauge) 
Display Color Preset 1

EVF Grid
Settings
Displayed Grid OffOn
V Half Way Level

S-OVF
Off

V Info Settings

120

―

On
On

120,
132

―

Off
Off
RAW+JPEG
No

g



Tab

Function

Default*1 *2 *3

G K UtilitybPixel Mapping
0.7 sec

0.7 sec

0.7 sec

0.7 sec

0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec
0.7 sec



































































Reset w
Reset 7
Reset cReset N
Call EVF Auto
0.7 sec
Switch
0.7 sec
End qU
Switch L 0.7 sec
Insert Slate
0.7 sec
Tone
0.7
sec
End D
0.7 sec
Reset D
Switch G Lock 0.7 sec
Call BKT
0.7 sec
Settings
End Flicker
0.7 sec
Scan

Level Adjust―
Touchscreen Settings
On
Menu Recall
RecallFisheye Compensation
Off
Battery Priority PBH Batteryc Battery
Settings
Battery Status―
Backlit LCD
Hold
Sleep
1min
Auto Power Off
4h
Quick Sleep Mode
Off
Backlit LCD 8 sec
Sleep
10 secEye-FiOn
Certification―

122

Additions/modifications by firmware update

Press-andhold Time

122,
159

―
End LV U
Reset LV U
Frame
End 6
Reset 6
Frame
Reset F

g

10





122



EN 211

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 3.2
EVF Auto Switch
Additions/modifications by firmware update

The Custom Menu (MENU[On1] and [On2].

212 ENa

Option[EVF Auto Switch]) now offers a choice of
Description

EVF Auto Switch[Off]: The viewfinder display does not light automatically when
you put your eye to the viewfinder. Press the u button to switch
between the viewfinder and monitor displays.
[On1]: The viewfinder display lights automatically when you put youreye to the viewfinder. Pressing the u button displays [EVF Auto
Switch] options.
[On2]: Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder display
on only if the monitor is closed. Pressing the u button displays[EVF Auto Switch] options.

Default settings
The default settings for new functions and the modified default settings are as follows.
*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].

G Custom Menu
Tab

10

G

Function

G a EVF Auto Switch

Default
On1*1 *2 *3g121

IndexSymbolsA

8 (Beep sound) ............................... 117
0 (Protect) .......................................81n Mode (movie mode) .....................102# RC Mode .......................................153# Slow Limit......................................131#+WB ............................................... 119# X-Sync. .........................................131
U (Close-up playback) .......................79s (Monitor brightness
adjustment) ....................................109
G (Index display) ...............................79
G/Info Settings ................................127
w+F ............................................... 119
j Image Stabilization...................... 114
j/Y Settings .................................. 115
jL Settings ..................................... 114
jH Settings .................................... 114
K Noise Filter .................................. 118
K Save Settings ................................54I/H (Underwater wide/Underwater
macro) .............................................68
 (Single-frame erase) .......................82
N Custom Settings ......................... 112
N Set Home.................................... 112
N Spot Metering ............................. 118
0 (Camera control) ..................... 117
W (language) ..................................109
k (One-touch white balance) ............67v (Image selection) ...........................82
5 Settings(AF target setting) .......................... 111
I (Face priority AF) ............................40
R (Image rotation) ...........................105
V Info Settings .................................121
W Keep Warm Color ....................... 119
z (Preview).........................................67z Settings ......................................... 116

A (Aperture priority mode) ..................27
AC adapter ........................................151
Accessories .......................................155
AdobeRGB ..........................................65
AEL/AFL ............................................123
AEL Metering ..................................... 118
AE lock ..................................45, 67, 123
AF Area................................................40
AF Area Pointer ................................. 111
AF Focus Adj. .................................... 112
AF Illuminator .................................... 112
AF Limiter .......................................... 111
AF Mode ........................................43, 51
AF Scanner........................................ 111
AF Targeting Pad ............................... 112
AF target setting(5 Settings) ................... 111
AF target settings ................................39
AF tracking ..........................................44
All x ............................................... 119
Anti-shock shooting .......................47, 98
ART (Art filter).....................................33
Art fade ................................................37
Art LV Mode ....................................... 115
Aspect ratio..........................................54
Assign Save Folder ...........................132
Assign to Custom Mode ......................87
Audio recording
Movie ......................................103, 104
Still image .........................................83
Auto Power Off ..................................122

B
Backlit LCD ........................................122
Battery charge .....................................13
Battery level .........................................18
Beep sound ....................................... 117
Bit rate ...............................................102
Bracketing............................................91
BULB ...................................................30

EN 213

Bulb photography ................................30
Bulb/Time Focusing ........................... 112
Bulb/Time Monitor ............................. 118
Bulb/Time Timer ................................ 118
Button function.....................................66

C
Cable clip .............................................13
C-AF (Continuous AF) .........................43
C-AF Lock.......................................... 111
C-AF+TR (AF tracking)........................44
Calendar display ..........................79, 128
Card .....................................................15
Card Setup ........................................ 110
Card Slot Settings..............................132
Close-up playback ...............................79
Color creator ........................................71
Color Filter ...........................................64
Color Space ................................. 65, 119
Composite Settings ........................... 118
Compression rate ..............................131
Connection
Computer ........................................139
Printer .............................................142
Smartphone ....................................134
Continuous AF .....................................43
Contrast ...............................................62
Copy
All images .......................................108
Single-frame .....................................81
Copyright Settings .............................120
Custom Menu ............................ 111, 169

F
Face priority AF ...................................40
File format..........................................148
File Name ..........................................120
File size .............................................148
Firmware............................................109
Flash ....................................................57
Flash intensity control (w) .................60
Flicker reduction ................................ 116
Focus mode .........................................43
Focus Ring ........................................ 112
Format ............................................... 110
Frame rate ................................. 103, 115

G
GPS log .............................................137
Gradation .............................................63
Grid Settings ...................................... 116

D

H

Date/time setting (X) ..........................19
Dial Direction ..................................... 113
Digital Tele-converter ...........................88
dpi Settings ........................................120
DPOF.................................................144

Half Way Rls With IS ......................... 114
HDMI ......................................... 117, 130
HDMI Output......................................101
HDR (High Dynamic Range) .........49, 95
Highlight&Shadow ...............................66
High Res Shot
(High resolution shooting) .........48, 99
Histogram display ................................23
Histogram Settings ............................ 116

E
Edit Filename.....................................120
Effect (i-Enhance) ................................65
Electronic Zoom...................................69

214 ENErase
All images ....................................... 110
Single-frame .....................................82
EVF Adjust .........................................121
EVF Auto Switch ................................121
EVF Grid Settings ..............................121
EVF Style...........................................133
EV Step ............................................. 117
Exposure compensation ......................39
Exposure Shift ................................... 117
External flash units ............................152
Eye-Fi ................................................122
Eye priority AF .....................................40I
iAUTO mode (A) ...........................31
Image aspect .......................................54
Image Overlay ...................................107
Image quality
Movie (nK) ...................................56
Still image (KK) ...........................55
Image quality settings ................131, 148
Image selection ...................................82
Image size .........................................148
Image Stabilizer ...................................53
Image transfer to smartphone ...........136
Index display................................79, 128
INFO button ..........................23, 77, 125
Information display ..............................20
In-movie image capture .....................107
Installation .........................................141
Interchangeable lenses .....................149
ISO-Auto ............................................ 117
ISO-Auto Set ..................................... 117
ISO sensitivity ................................42, 51
ISO Step ............................................ 117

J
JPEG Edit ..........................................106

K
Keystone Comp. ..................................97

L
Language setting (W) .....................109
Lens Info Settings ......................120, 132
Lens I.S. Priority ................................ 114
Level Adjust .......................................122
Level gauge .........................................23
Lever function ....................................124
Light box display ................................127
Live Bulb ............................................ 118
Live composite photography................30
Live control ........................................126
Live guide ............................................31
LIVE TIME ...........................................30
Live View Boost ................................. 115

Long time exposure(BULB/LIVE TIME) ..........................30
LV-Info ...............................................128
LV super control panel .........................50M
M (Manual mode) ................................29
Manual focus .......................................43
Menu............................................85, 165
Menu Recall.......................................122
Metering.........................................45, 51
MF .......................................................67
MF Assist ...........................................124
MF (Manual focus)...............................43
Mode Guide ....................................... 116
Monitor brightness adjustment ..........109
Monochrome Color ..............................64
Movie K .............................................103
Movie effect .........................................37
Movie shooting ....................................36
Movie Tele-converter ...........................37
Multi echo ............................................37
Multi Function ................................68, 70
Multi Function Settings ...................... 115
Multiple Exposure ................................95
My Clips ...............................................72

N
Noise Reduct. .................................... 118
Number of storable still pictures ........148

O
OI.Share ............................................134
Old film ................................................37
OLYMPUS Viewer 3 ..........................141
One shot echo .....................................37
One-touch white balance (k) ............67

P
P (Program mode) ..............................26
PC software .......................................141
Peaking........................................68, 124
PictBridge ..........................................142
Picture Mode .................................61, 88
Picture Mode Settings ....................... 115

EN 215

Pixel Count ........................ 119, 131, 148
Pixel mapping ....................................159
Playback
Movie ................................................81
Playback Menu ..........................105, 168
Position information ...........................137
Power battery holder .........................150
PreMF (Preset MF) ..............................44
Preset MF .......................................... 112
Press-and-hold Time .........................122
Preview (z).........................................67
Printing ..............................................142
Priority Set .........................................121
Pro Capture shooting...........................48
Program shift (%) ...............................26
Protect .................................................81
Protect reset ......................................108

Quick Erase .......................................121
Quick motion movie .............................75
Quick Sleep Mode .............................122

SD card..............................................147
Selfie Assist .......................................129
Self-timer .................................46, 54, 89
Sequential shooting .......................46, 54
Setup Menu ...............................109, 168
Shading Comp. .................................. 119
Share Order .........................................82
Sharpness ...........................................62
Shooting Menu ............................86, 165
Shooting modes...................................24
Silent shooting ...............................47, 98
Single AF .............................................43
Single AF and Manual focus ................43
Sleep ...........................................18, 122
Slideshow ............................................80
Slot (playback) ...................................132
Slow motion movie ..............................75
S-OVF................................................121sRGB ...................................................65
Storage ..............................................140
Super control panel .............................50
Super Spot AF .....................................41

R

T

RAW Data Edit ..................................105
RAW image .........................................56
RAW+JPEG Erase ............................121
Rec View ...........................................109
Registration .......................................141
Remote control mode(# RC Mode) ................................153
Remote shooting ...............................136
Reset ...................................................86
Reset Lens ........................................ 112
Rls priority.......................................... 114
Rotation .......................................79, 105

Test picture (K TEST) .......................67
Time Code Settings ...........................101
Time Lapse Movie ...............................90
Time lapse shooting ............................90
Time photography ................................30
Touch AF..............................................35
Touch screen operations ...............35, 84
Touchscreen Settings ........................122
Trimming
JPEG image....................................106
Movie ..............................................108
TV ......................................................130

SU

S (Shutter priority mode) .....................28
S-AF+MF (Single AF and Manual
focus) ...............................................43
S-AF (Single AF)..................................43
Saturation ............................................63
Save Settings ....................................132
Save Slot ...........................................132

Underwater wide/Underwater macro(I/H) ..........................................68
USB Mode ......................................... 117

Q

216 EN

V
Video Menu ...............................100, 166
Volume.................................................80

W
White balance ................................42, 52
White balance compensation ..............52
Wi-Fi connection method ...................137
Wi-Fi Settings ....................................137
Wireless remote control flash ............153

Z
Zoom frame AF ....................................41

EN 217

date of issue 2016.9

WD169005